1. business and industrial
2. construction

Specification Manual
WASHTENAW COUNTY
Renovations at:
Public Health Dental Clinic
111 North Huron Street
Ypsilanti, Michigan 48197
THA PROJECT No: 14-011
SECTION 00 01 01
PROJECT MANUAL
THA PROJECT No: 14-011
PROJECT:
RENOVATIONS AT:
WASHTENAW COUNTY PUBLIC HEALTH DENTAL CLINIC
111 NORTH HURON STREET
YPSILANTI, MICHIGAN 48197
OWNER:
WASHTENAW COUNTY
P.O. BOX 8645
ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 48107-8645
ARCHITECT:
THA ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS
817 EAST KEARSLEY STREET
FLINT, MICHIGAN 48503
TELEPHONE: (810) 767-5600
FACSIMILE:
(810) 767-1650
EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER:
PATTERSON DENTAL
4540 EAST PARIS AVENUE
SUITE H
GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN 49512
TELEPHONE: (616) 698-2029
FACSIMILE:
(616) 698-9877
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DATE: JUNE 30, 2014
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PROJECT MANUAL
00 01 01 - Page 1
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 01 01 - Project Title Page
00 01 10 - Table of Contents
00 42 01 - Proposal Form
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 33 01 - Submittal Summary
DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 - Demolition
DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 39 01 - Curing, Sealing, and Hardening Concrete Floors
DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY – NOT USED
DIVISION 05 -- METALS – NOT USED
DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework
DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 01 50 – Roof Restoration
07 84 00 - Firestopping
07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Frames
08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors
08 71 00 - Door Hardware
08 71 01 - Door Hardware Schedule
08 80 00 - Glazing
DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES
09 05 61 - Existing Flooring Removal and Preparation
09 05 62 – Existing Wall Covering Removal and Preparation
09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring
09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting
09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
10 14 00 - Signage
10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 1
10 57 01 - Wardrobe Coat Racks
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT – NOT USED
DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS
12 21 16 - Vertical Louver Blinds
DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – NOT USED
DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – NOT USED
DIVISION 20 -- MECHANICAL
20 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 13 00 – Fire Suppression Sprinklers
DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING
22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping
22 10 06 – Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
22 60 05 - Medical Air, Gas, and Vacuum Systems
DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
23 07 13 - Duct Insulation
23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
23 34 23 - HVAC Power Ventilators
23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
23 81 27 – Small Split-System Heating and Cooling
DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements
26 00 01 - Electrical Materials and Methods
26 05 01 - Minor Electrical Demolition
26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 34 - Conduit
26 05 37 - Boxes
26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
26 24 16 - Panelboards
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 51 00 - Interior Lighting
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – NOT USED
DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK – NOT USED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS – NOT USED
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – NOT USED
DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION – NOT USED
DRAWINGS
THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS, BOUND SEPARATELY, AND THIS PROJECT MANUAL FORM THE
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS:
SHEET NO.
SHEET TITLE.
G001
TITLE SHEET/CODE INFORMATION
A101
DEMOLITION PLAN, DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN, DEMOLITION DETAILS
A102
FLOOR PLAN
A103
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND DETAILS
A401
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN
A402
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
A601
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE AND DETAILS
F101
FIRE PROTECTION PLAN
M001
MECHANICAL/PLUMBING LEGEND, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
M101
MAIN LEVEL MECHANICAL PLANS
M102
UPPER LEVEL AND ROOF MECHANICAL PLANS
P101
MAIN LEVEL PLUMBING PLANS
P102
ENLARGED PLUMBING PLANS
E001
ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
E101
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION AND LIGHTING PLANS
E102
ELECTRICAL POWER PLANS AND DETAILS
E103
ELECTRICAL ROOF PLAN AND ALTERNATE #1
THE FOLLOWING SHEETS ARE INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES:
A-1
GENERAL FLOOR PLAN
C-1
CARPENTRY
P-1
PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
E-1
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
L-1
TREATMENT LIGHTING PLAN
DD-1
DENTAL EQUIPMENT DETAILS
N-1
NITROUS SPEC SHEET
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 3
SECTION 00 42 01
PROPOSAL FORM
PROJECT: WASHTENAW COUNTY PUBLIC HEALTH DENTAL CLINIC
PROJECT NO: 14-011
BIDDER INFORMATION:
Name of Bidder:____________________________________________________________
Address:__________________________________________________________________
City, State, ZIP:_____________________________________________________________
Telephone:____________________________ FAX Number:_________________________
Date:________________________________
TO: WASHTENAW COUNTY
I, the undersigned, have received the drawings and specifications for the Construction Work on the above
named project prepared by THA Architects / Engineers, Incorporated. I have also received the Addenda
acknowledged below and have included all their provisions and costs in my Bid. Having carefully
considered and examined all Contract Documents, having visited the site and examined all conditions
affecting the work, I submit the following Bid and hereby agree:
1. To furnish all labor, services, material, equipment and coordination of trades required to perform all
work in strict conformance with the Contract Documents, including all commissions, overhead, taxes,
fees and profit.
2. To complete the work by the time stipulated on the Proposal Form and under the conditions as
outlined in the Contract Documents.
3. To accept the provisions of the Instruction to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security.
4. To hold my Bid open for a maximum period of thirty (30) days.
BASE BID:
Proposal for the Work of renovations and remodeling of an existing facility for a dental clinic:
AMOUNT IN WORDS:
_______________________________________________________________________________
TOTAL AMOUNT:
$_________________________________________________
TIME FOR COMPLETION
This proposal is based on the Owner's intended Substantial Completion date of November 7, 2014.
If No, state the number of calendar days necessary to complete all the work and improvements, as
specified in the contract documents, from the date of execution of the contract between the Owner and
Contractor:
__________ Calendar Days
The Contractor shall not mobilize onsite until August 1, 2014.
No work shall be performed on a Sunday for the duration of the Project.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PROPOSAL FORM
00 42 01 - Page 1
ALTERNATES
I, the undersigned, hereby agree to include the following specified alternates, if accepted, for the sums
listed:
ALTERNATE #1: AMOUNT TO BE ADDED TO THE BASE BID TO REPLACE THE FURNACE UNITS ON
THE SECOND FLOOR:
AMOUNT IN WORDS:__________________________________________________________
TOTAL AMOUNT: $_________________________________________
ADDENDA
I, the undersigned, hereby acknowledge receipt of the following Addenda:
Addendum No.:
Addendum No.:
Addendum No.:
Date:
Date:
Date:
SITE SUPERINTENDENT
The following on-site job superintendent will be assigned to this project and will not be replaced or
reassigned for the duration of the project, without approval of the Owner and Design Professional:
Name:_______________________________________________________________________
ACCEPTANCE
I, the undersigned, upon notification of the acceptance of the proposal, agree to execute a contract for the
above work, for the above stated compensation. Further I agree, if awarded the contract, to execute and
deliver to the Owner within 10 days after the signing of the contract, satisfactory bonds, in the form of
100% "Performance Bond" and 100% "Labor and Material Payment Bond", according to the laws of the
State of Michigan governing this construction work, in an amount equal to the contract sum.
I have enclosed the required bid security, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid in the form of:
Secured Bid Bond:
Certified Check:
BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)
The Corporate Seal of
Affix Seal Here
____________________________________________
(Bidder - print the full name of your firm)
was hereunto affixed in the presence of:
____________________________________________
(Authorized signing officer, Title)
(Seal)
____________________________________________
(Authorized signing officer, Title)
END OF PROPOSAL FORM
PROPOSAL FORM
00 42 01 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 01 33 01
SUBMITTAL SUMMARY
THE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS LISTED ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, THE
SECTIONS THAT REQUIRE FORMAL SUBMITTALS FOR THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL’S REVIEW.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Samples
SECTION NUMBER & NAME
ARCHITECTURAL SECTIONS
03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry
06 41 00 – Architectural Wood Casework
07 84 00 – Firestopping
07 90 05 – Joint Sealers
08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Frames
08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors
08 71 00 – Door Hardware
08 80 00 – Glazing
09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 51 00 – Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 00 – Resilient Flooring
09 68 13 – Tile Carpeting
09 90 00 – Painting and Coating
10 14 00 – Signage
10 28 00 – Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
10 44 00 – Fire Protection Specialties
10 57 01 – Wardrobe Coat Racks
12 21 16 – Vertical Louver Blinds
MECHANICAL SECTIONS
21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 13 00 – Fire Suppression Sprinklers
22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 05 – Plumbing Piping
22 10 06 – Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures
22 60 05 – Medical Air, Gas and Vacuum Piping
23 07 13 – Duct Insulation
23 23 00 – Refrigerant Piping
23 31 00 – HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 33 00 – Air Duct Accessories
23 34 23 – HVAC Power Ventilators
23 37 00 – Air Outlets and Inlets
23 81 27 – Small Split-System Heating and Cooling
ELECTRICAL SECTIONS
26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 37 – Boxes
26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
26 24 16 – Panelboards
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Shop
Drawings
Product
Data
CONTRACTORS SHALL THOROUGHLY REVIEW ALL SECTIONS TO INSURE THAT ALL PRODUCT DATA, SHOP
DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, CERTIFICATES AND OTHER DOCUMENTS ARE SUBMITTED IN A TIMELY AND ACCURATE
MANNER.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
SUBMITTAL SUMMARY
01 33 01 – Page 1
Shop
Drawings
Y
Y
Y
Y
Samples
Product
Data
SECTION NUMBER & NAME
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
28 31 00 – Fire Detection and Alarm
END OF SUMMARY
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SUBMITTAL SUMMARY
01 33 01 – Page 2
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
B.
Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Owner’s General Requirements:
1. Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
2. Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.
3. Protection of Work and Existing Property.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
B.
NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.
1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction
of barricades and fences.
2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.
3. Include a summary of safety procedures.
E.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and
subsurface construction.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,
sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCOPE
A.
Remove interior portions of existing building.
B.
Sawcut and remove areas of existing concrete floor as noted on Drawings.
3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures
and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.
3. Use of explosives is not permitted.
4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structural elements to be
removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable
structures.
5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public.
7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants.
8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.
9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct
required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - Page 1
D.
Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
E.
Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.
F.
Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified measures have
been taken to protect vegetation to remain.
G.
Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring.
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
H.
Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,
sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
I.
If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Design Professional
and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and
mercury.
J.
Sawed joints shall extend substantially through the full thickness of the concrete so that a "clean break" is
made and that the adjacent concrete is not damaged. If adjacent concrete that is to remain is damaged as
a result of the Contractor's removal operations, it shall be replaced to the Owner's satisfaction at the
Contractor's expense.
K.
Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations.
L.
Temporary Interior Partitions - Non-Rated Conditions: Provide temporary partitions (and ceilings) as
required to separate Work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture
into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
1. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with
existing surfaces from floor to roof deck; STC Rating of 35; Flame Spread Rating of 25.
2. Hollow metal door and frame with commercial-duty lockset.
M. Temporary Interior Partitions - Rated Conditions: Provide temporary partitions as mandated by State of
Michigan Life Safety Codes to separate Work areas from Owner occupied areas and to provide fire-rated
walls, including egress doors where necessary.
1. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with
existing surfaces, of one (1) hour construction from floor to roof deck, in accordance with State Fire
Marshal memorandum 16.107. Include 36 inch wide, 20 minute labeled door and frame, with panic
hardware, positive latching, closer, and exit light.
C.
Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas.
3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements;
obtain required permits.
B.
Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C.
Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior
written notification to Owner.
E.
Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days
prior written notification to Owner.
F.
Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type;
protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.
G.
Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and
abandoned utilities.
H.
Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone;
identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain.
3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A.
Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing
record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.
3.
Report discrepancies to Design Professional before disturbing existing installation.
Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent
upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B.
Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction.
2. Provide sound retardant partitions of construction indicated on drawings in locations indicated on
drawings.
C.
Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or
modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
D.
Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new
construction specified.
2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
E.
Remove all incidental items, (re: trims, fasteners, wiring, conduit, mounting plates, etc.) not required by
and/or interfering with new construction or finishes, whether specifically shown or not.
F.
At existing wall or partition openings scheduled for infill, remove any bullnose masonry units and partial
(cut) units back to nearest mortar joint so that new masonry may be toothed in to match existing bond
patterns.
G.
Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove
existing systems and equipment as indicated.
st
nd
1. Maintain existing active systems on 1 and 2 floor that are to remain in operation; maintain access
to equipment and operational components.
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services,
maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.
3. See General Requirements for other limitations on outages and required notifications.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings;
remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.
H.
Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A.
Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B.
Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; do not burn or bury.
C.
Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
D.
Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
3.06 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS TO BE REMOVED AND RETAINED
A.
Remove the following materials and equipment to be retained by Owner. Deliver to location designated by
Owner.
1. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets.
2. Light Fixtures.
B.
Owner shall have the "Right of First Refusal" on any item removed during demolition. If Owner does not
exercise that right, Contractor shall dispose of all items off site in a legal manner.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - Page 3
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete infill at areas noted on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 20 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Mechanical items for casting into concrete.
B.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical items for casting into concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American
Concrete Institute International; 2010.
B.
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete;
American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
C.
ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 1998 (Reapproved 2004).
D.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
E.
ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International;
2004 (errata 2007).
F.
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute
International; 2000.
G.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
H.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
I.
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).
J.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete
Institute International; 2011.
K.
ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
L.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2013.
M. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b.
N.
ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013.
O.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.
P.
ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens;
2012a.
Q.
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2013.
R.
ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2010a.
S.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
T.
ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method; 2010b.
U.
ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
V.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in
Concrete; 2012.
W. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing; 2011.
X.
ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2013.
Y.
ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - Page 1
Z.
ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete;
1999 (Reapproved 2008).
AA. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2012.
AB. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2013).
AC. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion
Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a (Reapproved 2013).
AD. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated
Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
AE. COE CRD-C 48 - Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
AF. COE CRD-C 513 - COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; Corps of Engineers; 1974.
AG. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; Corps of Engineers;
1974.
AH. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.
AI. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified
requirements and installation instructions.
1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor
covering adhesives.
B.
Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures.
2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete Quality,
Mixing and Placing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Moisture Emission Reducing Curing and Sealing Compound: Provide warranty to cost of flooring
delamination failures for 10 years.
1. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring, remediation with a moisture vapor impermeable
surface coating, and replacement of flooring with comparable flooring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A.
Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will
produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280).
1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.
2. Finish: Unfinished.
3. Finish: Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A775/A775M, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain type.
1. Form: Flat sheets.
2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings.
C.
Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement
during concrete placement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type.
1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.
B.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.
C.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A.
Chemical Admixture Manufacturers:
1. AXIM: www.aximconcrete.com.
2. Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com.
3. Grace Construction Products: www.graceconstruction.com.
B.
Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement.
C.
Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Curing/Sealing Compound(Surfaces scheduled to receive adhered resilient finish flooring materials): Water
emulsion, resin base clear liquid type, specifically designed for use on surfaces scheduled to receive
adhered finish materials; equivalent to "1100-CLEAR" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc.
1. Areas scheduled to receive ceramic, quarry, porcelain, terrazzo, stone, clay or any other 'hard' tile
shall not receive Curing/Sealing Compounds.
B.
Liquid Curing Compound(Surfaces scheduled to remain exposed): ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or
translucent, Class B. Provide VOCOMP-25 manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc.
1. Areas scheduled to receive application of material specified in Section 03 39 01 shall not receive
Curing/Sealing Compounds listed in this section.
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A.
Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059 Type II.
1. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com.
b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com.
c. INTRALOK manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A.
Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B.
Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.
C.
Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field
experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Design Professional for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
D.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or
required by manufacturer.
E.
Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds
per square inch.
2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
3. Maximum Total Air Content: 3 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M.
4. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
2.08 MIXING
A.
On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not less than
1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
1. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to achieve
consistent color from batch to batch.
2. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions.
Job #14011
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Copyright THA 062314
03 30 00 - Page 3
B.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads
until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B.
Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
C.
Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
D.
Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning
with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and
where curing under humid conditions is required.
2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M.
B.
Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately
position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for
protection.
C.
Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions.
Splice laps with tie wire.
D.
Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately
placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B.
Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C.
Notify Design Professional not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples
taken.
E.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, and embedded parts will not be disturbed during concrete
placement.
F.
Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints
are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand
and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.
3.05 SLAB JOINTING
A.
Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after
placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth
of the slab.
3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:
1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B.
Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
C.
Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring
corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin floor
coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set
ceramic tile.
2. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish
marks and other appearance defects.
a. Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water-diluted hardener in three coats per
manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats.
E.
In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100
nominal.
3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature
drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for
hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests.
B.
Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to
commencement of concrete operations.
D.
Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with
specified requirements.
E.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test
cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 5 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
F.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions
as concrete it represents.
G.
Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M.
H.
Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) to
allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty requirements.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Design Professional and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified
requirements.
C.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Design Professional. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Design
Professional for each individual area.
3.12 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - Page 5
SECTION 03 39 01
CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Single application sealer-hardener for existing concrete floors.
C.
Precautions for avoiding staining concrete before and after application.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete slabs.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets, including product specifications, test data, preparation
instructions and recommendations, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, and
installation methods.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Applicator experienced with installation of product and certified by manufacturer, or
applicator experienced with similar products and providing manufacturer's field technician on site to advise
on application procedures; and providing adequate number of skilled workers trained and familiar with
application requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver product in factory numbered and sealed drums, with numbers recorded for Owner's records.
B.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened drums until ready for installation.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
No satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum or rust stains from concrete. Prevention is
therefore essential. Take precautions to prevent staining of concrete prior to application of
cure-seal-hardener and for minimum of three months after application:
1. If construction equipment must be used before application, diaper all components that might drip oil,
hydraulic fluid, or other liquids.
2. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.
3. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.
B.
Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
C.
Do not use frozen material; thaw and agitate prior to use.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer's warranty that a structurally sound concrete surface prepared and treated according
to the manufacturer's directions will remain permanently dustproof, hardened and water repellent. If after
the specified sealing period the treated surface does not remain dustproof, hardened and water repellent,
provide, at manufacturer's expense, sufficient material to reseal defective areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CURE-SEAL-HARDENER MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Curecrete Distribution, Inc; 1203 West Spring Creek Place, Springville, UT
84663. ASD. Tel: (800) 998-5664. Fax: (801) 489-3307. Email: [email protected].
www.ashfordformula.com
B.
Requests for substitutions received in accordance with General Requirements, may be considered for
manufacturer's with products that meet or exceed this specification..
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Cure-Seal-Hardener: Ashford Formula; water-based chemically-reactive penetrating sealer and hardener,
that seals by densifying concrete so that water molecules cannot pass through but air and water vapor can,
while allowing concrete to achieve full compressive strength, minimizing surface crazing, and eliminating
dusting.
1. Colorless, transparent, odorless, non-toxic, non-flammable.
2. Containing no solvents or volatile organic compounds.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS
03 39 01 - Page 1
3.
4.
5.
B.
USDA approved for food handling facilities.
Allowing traffic on floors within 2 to 3 hours, with chemical process complete within 3 months.
No change to surface appearance except a sheen developed due to traffic and cleaning.
Water: Clean, potable.
2.03 PAINT REMOVAL PRODUCT
A.
Cleaning Material:
1. Cleaning Agent: Gel type suitable for conditions present.
a. Product shall not contain methylene-chloride, chromates or phenols.
b. Product shall be non-corrosive and non-hazardous.
c. Product must be VOC and AQMD compliant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and are suitable for application of
product.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Cleaning Chemicals: Brush gel over existing concrete floor surfaces at painted locations in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide subsequent applications, as required, to completely remove
all paint and any ghost patterns.
1. Care shall be exercised to avoid application of gel to adjoining floors or walls.
2. Low Pressure Rinse: Beginning at the perimeter of the area, rinse with maximum 400 psi pressure to
floor surfaces, providing uniform finish.
3. The Contractor shall complete a test cleaning on one 3 x 3 foot section of existing painted floor for the
Owner's inspection and acceptance. This quality shall be the standard for the balance of areas that
require cleaning.
D.
If required, utilize a rotary machine with a carborundum disk to remove and clean existing concrete floors.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
If this is the applicator's first project using this product, provide the manufacturer's technical representative
on-site to familiarize installers with proper procedures.
C.
Prevent damage to and soiling of adjacent work.
D.
Existing Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener only to clean bare concrete.
1. Thoroughly remove previous treatments, laitance, oil, and other contaminants.
2. Saturate surface with cure-seal-hardener; respray or broom excess onto dry spots.
3. Keep surface wet with cure-seal-hardener for minimum soak-in period of 30 to 40 minutes.
4. If, after the 30 minute soak-in period, most of the material has been absorbed, remove all excess
material using broom or squeegee, especially from low spots.
5. If, after the 30 minute soak-in period, most of the material remains on the surface, wait until it
becomes slippery and then flush entire surface with water removing all residue of cure-seal-hardener
and squeegee completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until no residue remains.
6. If water is not available, remove residue using squeegee.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect floors until Project is complete.
1. Comply with precautions listed under "PROJECT CONDITIONS".
2. Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations because water will
accelerate the sealing and scrubbing will impart a shine.
3. Clean up spills immediately and spot-treat stains with good degreaser or oil emulsifier.
CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS
03 39 01 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
B.
Precautions and cleaning are the responsibility of the installing Contractor until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS
03 39 01 - Page 3
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.
B.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
B.
AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; American Forest
and Paper Association; 2012.
C.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012.
F.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2013.
G.
ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing;
2013.
H.
ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board;
2014.
I.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2013.
J.
ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for
Fire Testing; 2010.
K.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings
in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
L.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
M. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
N.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection
Association; 2010.
O.
ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2013.
P.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
Q.
PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; National Institute of Standards and
Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce; 2010.
R.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Department of Commerce; 2010.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B.
Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is
specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - Page 1
2.
Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American
Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and
grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Communications and Electrical Equipment Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density
fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
B.
Other Applications:
1. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.
2. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and
preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required
strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B.
Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain
structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing.
C.
Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D.
Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing
indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual.
3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty
items, and trim.
B.
In metal stud walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly
indicated.
C.
Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Handrails.
4. Grab bars.
5. Towel and bath accessories.
6. Wall-mounted door stops.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Communications and Electrical Equipment Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs (anchors to
masonry walls) with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 12 inches on center on all
edges and into studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to
studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height.
5. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing/Blocking Members: 1/8 inch from true position, maximum.
3.09 CLEANING
A.
Waste Disposal:
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or
“waste-to-energy” facilities.
B.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - Page 3
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Installation of door hardware.
C.
Installation of toilet accessories.
D.
Solid Surfacing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.
C.
Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
D.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
E.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of wood partitions and screens.
F.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
G.
Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
C.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.
D.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
E.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012.
F.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.
G.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
H.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
I.
HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood &
Veneer Association; 2009.
J.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
K.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent
components.
B.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for counter supports and shelf hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
3. Include certification program label.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of solid surfacing material, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating color, pattern and
specified finish.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00 - Page 1
D.
Samples: Submit samples of plastic laminate and PVC edge material.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication
and throughout the duration of the project.
B.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of
completed work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI
Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.
B.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by
applicable code.
2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS
A.
Softwood Lumber: Spruce-ine-Fir species, Plain sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with
vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.03 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as
recommended for application.
B.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2-2002; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant
adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required to match existing casework.
1. Use for concealed components.
2. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS
A.
Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS.
C.
Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, BKL; undecorated plastic laminate.
D.
Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not containing
formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
2.05 SOLID SURFACING: SOLID SURFACING SHEET OR PLASTIC RESIN CASTING SELF-SUPPORTING
OVER STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.
A.
Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.
B.
Solid Surfacing Sheet: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler,
and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard
woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum;
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Semi-gloss, gloss rating of 25 to 50.
3. Color/Pattern Family: Fine-grained "salt-and-pepper" look, low contrast.
4. Color and Pattern: To be selected from all manufacturer's full line.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Dupont: www.corian.com.
b. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
c. Aristech Acrylics: www.avonitesurfaces.com.
d. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
e. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
C.
The Design Professional reserves the right to select the solid surfacing colors/patterns from any
combination of the manufacturer's listed above.
D.
Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.
E.
Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1/2 inch thick; square edge.
2.06 FASTENINGS
A.
Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing
formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
B.
Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; zinc finish in concealed locations and nickel chrome finish
in exposed locations.
C.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A.
Cable Grommets: Standard plastic cable grommets; spring-loaded self-closing, in color to be selected by
Design Professional.
1. Opening Diameter: Minimum 2-3/8 inches.
2. Product: "GRS-60" manufactured by The Engineered Products Company (EPCO):
www.epcohardware.com.
3. Quantity: One (1) grommet per four (4) lineal feet of countertop.
B.
Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; 3 mm thickness; of width to match
component thickness, color as scheduled to match HPDL color.
1. Use at all exposed plastic laminate-faced shelf and countertop edges.
2.08 HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.
B.
Closet Shelf Brackets: Lavi Industries No. LB-10-8152, Bright Chrome.
1. Closet Hang Rods: EPCO No. 830, oval, 1 mm wall thickness tubing, Chrome.
2. Closet Flange Rod Supports: EPCO No. 840, Chrome.
3. Intermediate Rod Support: EPCO No. 842, Chrome.
C.
Shelf Standards: 14 gauge, Anochrome finish; No. 83 ANO manufactured by Knape and Vogt.
D.
Lock-Lever Shelf Brackets: 14 gauge, heavy-duty nylon cam lock lever, Anochrome finish; No. 160
manufactured by Knape & Vogt.
E.
Adjustable Slanting Brackets: 14 gauge, heavy-duty nylon cam lock lever, Anochrome finish; No. 179
manufactured by Knape & Vogt.
F.
Aluminum Countertop Supports:
1. Studwall Mounted: "Rakks Surface Mount Support" brackets manufactured by Rangine Corporation,
114 Union Street, Millis, MA 02054 - (800) 826-6006.
2. Size: 18 x 24 inch
3. Finish: Powder coated. Color to be selected by Design Professional.
2.09 FABRICATION
A.
Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for
scribing and site cutting.
F.
Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and
joints hairline.
G.
Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse non-visible face of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
H.
Apply plastic laminate to all surfaces of adjustable shelving.
2.10 FABRICATION - SOLID SURFACING
A.
Fabricate solid surfacing in accordance with manufacturer's fabrication instructions. Fabricate units without
joints where possible.
B.
Color of joint adhesive used must produce a totally invisible seamless surface.
C.
Surface and edge gloss must be consistent throughout.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00 - Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to
receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for
grade indicated.
B.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional
overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D.
Install hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00 in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Locate cable grommets as per Owner's preference and install in countertops per manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 06 41 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B.
Countertops.
C.
Cabinet hardware.
D.
Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Solid surface countertops.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009.
C.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.
D.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
E.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
F.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
3. Include certification program label.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
C.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of plastic laminate.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of
cost of woodwork for this Project.
2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication
and throughout the duration of the project.
B.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of
completed work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect units from moisture damage.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building
spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI
Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.
C.
Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - Page 1
2.02 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Arborite, division of ITW Canada: www.arborite.com.
2. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
3. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar\Pionite\Panolam : www.panolamindustries.com.
4. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
B.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications.
C.
Colors will be selected from manufacturer's standard samples and may be a combination of selections
from any and all manufacturers.
1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
3. Flame Retardant Surfaces: HGF, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
4. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
5. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed
backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
2.03 COUNTERTOPS
A.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL, conventionally
fabricated and self-edge banded.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.
B.
Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; 3 mm thickness; of width to match
component thickness, color as scheduled to match HPDL color.
C.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
1. The following fasteners are not acceptable:
a. "Drywall"-type screws, regardless of size, thread style or coatings.
b. Staples.
c. "European"-style.
d. Mechanical, whether concealed or exposed.
e. Nails.
f.
Plastic gussets, braces or angles.
D.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or
chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed
locations.
E.
Screws at removable panels to be nickel-plated, oval head type, #10 w/countersunk-style finish washers.
F.
Finish Washers: Countersunk style, brass with nickel-plate finish.
1. Product: "#10CFW" manufactured by Alma Bolt Company: www.almabolt.com.
G.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
H.
Cable Grommets: Standard plastic cable grommets; spring-loaded self-closing, in color to be selected by
Design Professional.
1. Opening Diameter: Minimum 2-3/8 inches.
2. Product: "GRS-60" manufactured by The Engineered Products Company (EPCO):
www.epcohardware.com.
3. Quantity: One (1) grommet per four (4) lineal feet of countertop.
2.05 HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as scheduled for quality grade specified.
B.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and
coordinated self rests, polished chrome or satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.
1. Product: #346 ANO manufactured by Knape & Vogt.
C.
Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, 4 inch centers, "U" shaped wire pull, 4 inch centers.
1. Product: MC402-4 manufactured by Epco Co..
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
D.
Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finishbronze with satin
finish.
1. Product: CLPN05 manufactured by Kenstan Lock Co..
2. Product: Elbow catch for inactive door, strike plate has slot to provide adjustment, stamped steel;
polished chrome; #1016-N manufactured by Epco Co.
E.
Combination Locks(Employee Lounge-118): Built-in combination lock with steel body for single-point
horizontal latch lockers.
F.
1.
Operation: Extra-long locking bolt without dead bolt locking. Lock utilizes slam-shut operation.
2.
Mounting: Concealed in right and left-handed doors.
3.
Description: 3 digit combination and 5 preset combination changes with 5 pin tumbler lock cylinder
for access using control key.
4.
Dial: Durable plastic with textured lip for non-slip, one-handed grip and pull operation.
a.
Color: Black.
b.
Provide with a brass escutcheon plate.
4.
Extension set: Provide for locker doors 11/16 to 3/4 inch thick.
5.
Product: “MODEL 1652/1653MD” manufactured by Master Lock Company
LLC: www.masterlock.com.
ADA Compliant Lock(Employee Lounge-118):
1.
Description: 3 digit combination and 5 preset combination changes with 5 pin tumbler lock cylinder
which is master keyed to a master key and student key.
2.
Product: “MODEL 1651MKADA” manufactured by Master Lock Company
LLC: www.masterlock.com.
G.
Catches: Roller-Type, steel case, zinc finish.
1. Product: #503 manufactured by Epco Co.
H.
Drawer Slides:
1. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.
2. Mounting: Side mounted.
3. Stops: Positive type.
4. Products:
a. Accuride International, Inc; Product: www.accuride.com.
b. Grass America Inc; Product: www.grassusa.com.
c. Hettich America, LP; Quadro: www.hettichamerica.com.
d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 8405 (8505 at file drawers):
www.knapeandvogt.com.
I.
Hinges: Semiconcealed, steel five knuckle type type, finish and color as selected by Design Professional.
1. Products:
a. Grass America Inc; Product: www.grassusa.com.
b. Hardware Resources; Product: www.hardwareresources.com.
c. Hettich America, LP; Sensys: www.hettichamerica.com.
d. Julius Blum, Inc; Product: www.blum.com.
J.
Peninsula Adjustable Legs
1. Material: Six (6) inch diameter, adjustable Leg; 16 gauge tubular steel, welded.
2. Polypropylene trim ring installed in end of tube to match leg color.
3. Fixed top plate: 11" W x 11" D x 0.187" H requires 4 - #10 screws for fastening to countertop.
4. Finish: Factory powder coated.
5. Color: To be selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's standard colors.
6. Product: No. GB-6400 manufactured by Gibraltar, Inc: www.gibraltarinc.com.
2.06 STEEL COUNTERTOP SUPPORTS:
A.
Stud Wall Mounted: "Work Station Brackets" manufactured by A & M Hardware, 400 W. Gramby Street,
Manheim, PA 17545 - (888) 647-0200.
B.
Size: 24 x 29 inch, LLV
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - Page 3
C.
Finish: Black Powder Coat
2.11 FABRICATION
A.
Cabinet Doors: Flush style.
B.
Cabinet Body Members:
1. Acceptable Joinery Technique:
a. Tops, Exposed Ends and Bottoms: Doweled (3 inches OC) and pressure-glued.
b. Face Frames and Plant-On Backs: Butt joint, pressure-glued and fastened with high thread
screws (NOT drywall-type screws) at eight (8) inches OC.
2. The following styles of joinery are not acceptable:
a. "European" assembly screws.
b. Concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners.
c. Spline or Biscuit.
d. 90 degree butt joints.
e. Mitered joints (Full faced or lock).
f.
Square shoulder.
g. Plastic or metal brackets, braces, gussets or angles.
C.
Drawer Members:
1. Acceptable Joinery Techniques: Dovetail, Dowel, French Dovetail, Lock Shoulder.
2. The following styles of joinery are not acceptable:
a. "European" assembly screws.
b. Concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners.
c. Spline or Biscuit.
d. 90 degree butt joints.
e. Mitered joints (Full faced or lock).
f.
Square shoulder.
g. Plastic or metal brackets, braces, gussets or angles.
D.
Cabinets and shelves shall be constructed of the following materials:
1. Cabinet Body: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick.
a. For cabinets that exceed 36 inches in width, the horizontal members shall be Medium Density
Fiberboard (MDF), 1 inch thick.
2. Cabinet Doors: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick.
3. Shelves: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick for shelves up to 36 inches in length, 1
inch thick for shelves over 36 inches in length.
a. Exposed shelves shall be laminated with 0.048 HPDL on all surfaces.
4. Backs: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/8 inch thick.
5. Drawer Fronts: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick.
6. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: (Fabricator’s Option-Select One)
a. Solid hardwood lumber, 1/2 inch thick.
b. Hardwood plywood, 7 ply, no voids, 1/2 inch thick, eased edges at inside faces.
c. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 1/2 inch thick laminated on interior drawer surfaces with
0.048 HPDL; One (1) mm thick PVC edgebanding on top edge of box.
7. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, captured in grooves on drawer frame.
8. Cabinet Liner: "Melamine"-type panels will be acceptable for use only at cabinet interiors and
adjustable shelves which are closed to view by doors. Open casework which is exposed to view,
without doors or drawers, shall receive 0.048 HPDL finishes on all surfaces. All other surfaces,
including tops and bottoms of wall hung cabinets shall receive 0.048 HPDL finishes regardless of the
position or elevation of the member.
a. Cabinet liner is not acceptable on exposed adjustable shelves.
E.
Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
F.
Edging: Fit doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any
single length.
G.
Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
H.
Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured
sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim.
I.
Provide minimum 5 mm holes, one (1) inch on center w/dual pin supports for shelving; centerline of holes
shall be a minimum of one (1) inch and a maximum of three (3) inches from the front and back edge of the
depth of the shelf to be supported with a spread of no less than 60% of the shelf in any case.
J.
Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows:
1. Provide center matched panels at each elevation.
2. Provide sequence matching across each elevation.
3. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks.
K.
Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches
on center.
L.
Adhere back splash to countertop substrate and secure with wood screws at 8 inches on center.
M. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site
dimensions. Seal cut edges.
N.
Install locks on all doors and drawers indicated on Drawings.
1. Minimum Quantity: 89
2. Minimum Quantity of Combination Locks at Employee Lounge-118: 18 (One ADA Lock).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
C.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim for this purpose.
D.
Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
E.
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match
surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
F.
Locate cable grommets in countertops as per Owner's preference and install per manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
C.
Adjust all doors and drawers to provide equal margins.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean casework, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - Page 5
SECTION 07 01 50
ROOF RESTORATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
All restoration, repairs, reflashing work to the existing membrane.
B.
Individual trades performing work that will require roof penetrations shall coordinate such work
with the project Roofing Contractor. Trade Contractors shall create all required roof openings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 20 00 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that work has been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Class A Fire Hazard
Classification. Roofing repairs shall conform to applicable code and maintain fire resistance
ratings of present roof assemblies.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in membrane roofing installation and certified by eixisitng
roofing membrane material manufacturer.
C.
Upon completion of the roofing repairs, an authorized representative shall inspect and verify
that installations are in compliance with material manufacturer's specification and details.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Deliver materials to job site in their original, tightly-sealed containers or unopened packages.
B.
Materials shall be clearly labelled with manufacturers name and product identification.
C.
Protect rigid insulations from exposure to sunlight and fire ignition. Store flammable materials in
cool, dry are away from buildings, sparks and open flames.
D.
Do not store materials, nor position roofing equipment on roof decks in concentrations
exceeding design live loading.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install materials during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below
minimum recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MEMBRANE SYSTEM MATERIALS
A.
Seaming materials: As furnished by membrane manufacturer.
B.
Flexible Flashings: As furnished by membrane manufacturer.
C.
Control or Expansion Joint Flashing: Flexible flashing, metal counter flashings, closed cell foam
filler and wood materials, in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details.
D.
Pipe Boots and Pre-Formed Corners: Molded, as furnished by membrane manufacturer.
E.
Adhesives, Primers, Sealants and Pourable Sealers: As furnished by membrane manufacturer.
2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Roof insulation used shall be of same type as existing for each roofing system present.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ROOF RESTORATION
07 01 50 – Page 1
B.
Sweep clean surface areas to be repaired. Remove all loose gravel, dirt, debris and foreign
materials.
3.02 MEMBRANE AND INSULATION REPLACEMENT
A.
Verify that deck is structural sound, smooth, clean and dry.
B.
Clean all surfaces at edges of replacement areas. Extend minimum 12 inches onto remaining
roof surface.
C.
Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.03 REPAIR OF VENT STACK FLASHINGS
A.
Spud clean all aggregate from area around vent stack. Extend minimum 18 inches onto roof
surface.
B.
Trowel coat of roofing cement onto area 12 inches square around stack and 3 inches up the
stack.
C.
Install new flashing collar over stack and securely embed into roofing cement.
D.
Tighten clamp around flashing collar and seal.
E.
Install additional flashing membrane to comply with existing roof membrane manufacturer’s
requirements.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Arrange for inspection of repairs by representative of roof membrane manufacturer to ensure
that warranty is maintained.
END OF SECTION
ROOF RESTORATION
07 01 50 – Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Firestopping systems.
B.
Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies, whether
indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 95 00 - Joint Sealers.
B.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
C.
Section 20 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
D.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2012.
B.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a.
C.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011).
D.
ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barriers Using
Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus; 2010.
E.
ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Continuity Head-of-Wall Joint
Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies; 2011.
F.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
G.
FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001.
H.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
I.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
J.
UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
2004.
K.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and
firestopping test or design number.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when
tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey) will
be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after
installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.
2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com.
5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
6. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
C.
Materials: Use any material meeting requirements.
D.
Firestopping Materials with Volatile Content: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
E.
Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested
assembly design.
F.
Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2307
to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the floor assembly.
1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as
indicated.
2. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated.
3. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated.
4. Where floor assembly is not required to have a fire rating, provide systems that have been tested to
show L Rating as indicated.
B.
Head-of-Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non-Rated Floor and Fire-Rated Wall: Use any system that
has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of
floor or wall, whichever is greater.
1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as
indicated.
C.
Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire-Rated: Use
any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating
equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs.
1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as
indicated.
2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated.
3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated.
4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful
testing.
D.
Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have
fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.
1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated.
2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated.
3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated.
4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful
testing.
2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that has F Rating
equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other
specified requirements.
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect
bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
completely closing openings.
B.
Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Install labeling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - Page 3
SECTION 07 90 05
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.
C. Section 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B.
ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
E.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate
preparation, limitations, and color availability.
B.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's physical samples (beads), 4 inches in size illustrating sealant colors for
selection.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit
loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
3. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com.
4. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
Job #14011
JOINT SEALERS
Copyright THA 062314
07 90 05 - Page 1
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)
content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
Type A - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single
component, paintable.
1. Color: CUSTOM color to be selected by Design Professional.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
C.
Type B - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew
resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible
with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to
50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and
material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G.
Tool joints concave.
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - Page 3
SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non-fire-rated steel frames.
B.
Steel frames for wood doors.
C.
Fire-rated steel frames.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
B.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for borrowed lites.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities;
International Code Council; 2009.
B.
ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.
C.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors
and Frames; 1998 (R2011).
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
F.
NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
G.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
H.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and
locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying
location of different finishes, if any.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Frames:
1. Amweld International LLC: www.amweld.com.
2. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
3. Republic Doors and Frames: www.republicdoor.com.
2.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 11 13 - Page 1
2.
3.
Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in
addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
2.03 STEEL FRAMES
A.
General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
a. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 Level 3
Doors: 14 gage frames
2. Finish: Factory primed for field finishing.
3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with
top.
B.
Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Face welded type.
1. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
C.
Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Face welded type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
B.
Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners;
prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.
C.
Mechanical Fasteners for Concealed Metal-to-Metal Connections: Self-drilling, self-tapping, steel with
electroplated zinc finish.
D.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door.
E.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.07 FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
F.
Touch up damaged factory finishes.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.05 SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 11 13 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
B.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
D.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.
C.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
D.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
E.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for
hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
G.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 by 8 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and
sheen.
H.
Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication
and throughout the duration of the project.
C.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of
completed work.
D.
Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as
indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;
or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored
more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
B.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective
materials, and telegraphing core construction.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc: www.algomahardwoods.com.
2. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com.
3. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
4. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.
5. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
6. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.: www.mohawkdoors.com.
7. Oshkosh Door Company: www.oshkoshdoor.com.
8. VT Industries: www.vtindustries.com.
9. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 DOORS AND PANELS
A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as
indicated above.
B.
Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as
required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain
sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated.
1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.
B.
Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style
tamper proof screws.
B.
Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge.
C.
Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge,
specifically for double doors.
2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.
2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.
C.
Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has been applied
full-width.
D.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware
requirements and dimensions.
E.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in
accordance with specified quality standard.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
F.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A.
Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 - Finishing
for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed.
b. Stain: As selected by Design Professional.
c. Sheen: Satin.
B.
Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C.
Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B.
Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - Page 3
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items
specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of hardware.
B.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
D.
Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed
in the hardware sets:
1. Cabinet Hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations
of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements
of the Specifications.
2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building
accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction
and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.
3. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state and local building
code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes
of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels.
4. Hardware Supplier:
a. Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate
inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 50 miles of the project. The
distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or
have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
5. Manufacturer:
a. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with
requirements.
b. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Pre-installation Meeting:
1. Before hardware installation, General Contractor will request a hardware installation meeting be
conducted on the installation of hardware; specifically that of locksets, closers, exit devices, overhead
stops and coordinators. Manufacturer's representatives of the above products, in conjunction with the
hardware supplier for the project, shall conduct the meeting. Meeting to be held at job site and
attended by installers of hardware for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Meeting to address
proper coordination and installation of hardware, per finish hardware schedule for this specific project,
by using installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates, physical product samples and
installation videos.
2. When any electrical hardware is specified this meeting shall also include the following
trades/installers: Electrical, Security, Alarm systems and Design Professional.
3. Convene one week or more prior to commencing work of this Section.
4. The Hardware Supplier shall include the cost of this meeting in his proposal.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Hardware Schedule
1. Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed by Owner.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 1
2.
3.
Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for
the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise.
Schedule will include the following:
a. Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set.
b. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as
follows:
CATEGORY
Hinges
Locksets
Kickplates
SPECIFIED
Manufacturer A
Manufacturer X
Open
SCHEDULED
Manufacturer B
Manufacturer X
Manufacturer Z
c.
d.
4.
5.
Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations.
Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing,
size, door material, frame material, and UL listing.
e. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish.
f.
Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers.
g. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets.
h. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions
and specialty hardware.
i.
"Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved."
j.
Typed Copy.
k. Double-Spacing.
l.
8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets
m. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols.
Product Data:
a. Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware.
b. Submit product data with hardware schedule.
Key Schedule:
a. Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have been
followed.
b. Submit as a separate schedule.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number,
and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to
the work. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this
requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.
B.
Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the
comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is
listed, it is understood that this is the owner’s Building Standard and "no substitution" is allowed.
2.02 HINGES
A.
Furnish hinges of class and size as listed in sets.
1. Numbers used are Ives (IVE).
2. Products of a BHMA member are acceptable.
2.03 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS - HEAVY DUTY CYLINDRICAL-TYPE
A.
Function numbers listed are IR-Schlage.
B.
Provide 2-3/4 inch backset.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
C.
Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide
strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond doorframe trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to
center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors.
D.
Locksets and Latchsets:
1. IR-Schlage
2. Best
3. Falcon
ND
93K
ND
2.04 CLOSERS
A. Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers and
supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule.
B. Acceptable manufacturers and types:
1.
LCN series as listed in sets.
2.05 OVERHEAD HOLDERS AND STOPS
A.
Type, function and fasteners must be same as Glynn-Johnson specified. Size per manufacturer's selector
chart. Plastic end caps, hold open mechanisms and shock blocks are not allowed. End caps must be
finished same as balance of unit.
B.
Manufacture products using base material of Brass/Bronze for US3, US4, & US10B finished products and
300 Stainless Steel for US32 & US32D finished products.
C.
Type, function, and fasteners must be the same as Glynn-Johnson specified. Size per manufacturer's
selector chart.
1. IR-Glynn-Johnson
2.06 KICK PLATES
A.
Furnish.050 inches thick 10" high x door width less 2" at single doors and less 1” at pairs. Where glass or
louvers prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2”.
B.
Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable.
2.07 BUMPERS
A. Wrought, forged, or cast, approximately 2-1/2 inch diameter, convex or concave rubber center, concealed
fasteners.
1.
Ives
WS406/407
2.
BHMA L02101.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in
Hardware Sets.
2.09 FASTENERS
A.
Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields
for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish
machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum
doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK"
type screws are not acceptable.
B.
Sex bolts will not be permitted on reinforced metal doors or wood doors where blocking is specified.
2.10 FINISHES
A.
Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626. Provide finish for each item as indicated in sets.
2.11 TEMPLATES AND HARDWARE LOCATION
A.
Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and
frame manufacturers.
B.
Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge.
C.
Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 3
2.12 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
All cylinders for this project will be supplied by one supplier regardless of door type and location.
B.
Provide disposable or keyed construction cores for use during construction period as specified in sets.
Permanent cores will be furnished to the Owner's Representative prior to occupancy. The Owner or
Owner's Security Agent in conjunction with the supplying distributor shall remove construction cores and
install final cores.
1. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.
C.
Provide cylinders master and grand master keyed according to Owner's instructions. Provide change keys
for each cylinder, master and grand master keys as required by Owner.
The Finish Hardware supplier will meet with Architect and/or Owner to finalize keying requirements and
obtain keying instructions in writing.
D.
1.
Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.
E.
Deliver all permanent keys, key blanks and other security keys as determined in keying meeting.
F.
Key Material: Provide manufacturer's standard embossed keys of nickel silver to ensure durability. Furnish
keys in the following quantities:
1. 12 each Temporary construction keys.
2. 2 each
Control Keys.
3. 6 each
Grand Master Keys.
4. 6 each
Master keys per master group.
5. 12 each Keys per cylinder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
General:
1. Install hardware according to manufacturers installations and template dimensions. Attach all items of
finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture
of the item.
2. Provide blocking/reinforcement for all wall mounted Hardware.
3. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames will be drilled
and tapped for machine screws.
4. Solid wood doors and frames: full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting screws.
Locations:
1. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items.
2. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.
DIMENSION
CATEGORY
Hinges
Door Manufacturer's Standard
Levers
Door Manufacturer's Standard
Field Quality Inspection:
1.
Inspect material furnished, its installation and adjustment, and instruct the Owner's personnel in
adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware.
2.
Locksets and exit devices shall be inspected after installation and after the HVAC system is in
operation and balanced, to insure correct installation and proper operation.
3.
Closers shall be inspected and adjusted after the HVAC system is in operation and balanced, to
insure correct installation and proper operation.
4.
A written report stating compliance, and also locations and kinds of noncompliance shall be
forwarded to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware distributor, hardware installer and
building owner.
3.02 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A.
Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative to inspect material furnished and its installation
and adjustment, to make final hardware adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment,
care and maintenance of hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
B.
Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the factory representative and adjusted after
installation and after the HVAC system is in operation, to insure correct installation and proper adjustment
in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also
recording locations and kinds of noncompliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Design
Professional with copies to the General Contractor, hardware distributor and hardware installer.
3.03 TECHNICAL AND WARRANTY INFORMATION
A.
At the completion of the project, the technical and warranty information coalesced and kept on file by the
General Contractor shall be given to the Owner. In addition to both the technical and warranty information,
all factory order acknowledgement numbers supplied to the General Contractor during the construction
period shall be given to the Owner. The warranty information and factory order acknowledgement numbers
shall serve to both expedite and properly execute any warranty work that may be required on the various
hardware items supplied on the project.
B.
Submit to General Contractor, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special
installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products.
3.04 SCHEDULE - SEE SECTION 08 71 01
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 5
SECTION 08 71 01
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the Owner and Design
Professional. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware
schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the
attention of the Design Professional with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted
items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional
hardware required for proper application and functionality.
Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. RF - Rixson
4. RO - Rockwood
5. RU - Corbin Russwin
6. SA - Sargent
7. SU - Securitron
8. NO - Norton
HARDWARE SET NO. 01
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
ENTRANCE LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 EA
WALL STOP
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND53PD SPA
4011
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS406/407CCV
652
626
689
630
630
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND50PD SPA
652
626
IVE
SCH
WS406/407CCV
630
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND10S SPA
WS406/407CVX
652
626
630
IVE
SCH
IVE
HARDWARE SET NO. 02
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
ENTRANCE/OFFICE
LOCK
1 EA
WALL STOP
HARDWARE SET NO. 03
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
PASSAGE SET
1 EA
WALL STOP
Project #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
08 71 01 – Page 1
HARDWARE SET NO. 04
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 EA
WALL STOP
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND80PD SPA
4011
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS406/407CVX
652
626
689
630
630
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND80PD SPA
4111 CUSH
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
652
626
689
630
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND66PD SPA
4011
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS406/407CVX
652
626
689
630
630
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
652
626
652
IVE
SCH
GLY
HARDWARE SET NO. 05
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
HARDWARE SET NO. 06
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
DBL CYL STORE LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 EA
WALL STOP
DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS.
HARDWARE SET NO. 07
EACH TO HAVE:
* EXISTING HDWE TO REMAIN *
HARDWARE SET NO. 08
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
PASSAGE SET
1 EA
OH STOP
Project #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND10S SPA
450S J
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
08 71 01 – Page 2
HARDWARE SET NO. 09
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND80PD SPA
4111 CUSH
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
652
626
689
630
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND40S SPA
WS406/407CCV
652
626
630
IVE
SCH
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND53PD SPA
WS406/407CCV
652
626
630
IVE
SCH
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND40S SPA
4011
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS406/407CCV
652
626
689
630
630
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND70PD SPA
450S
4011
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
652
626
652
689
630
IVE
SCH
GLY
LCN
IVE
HARDWARE SET NO. 10
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
PRIVACY LOCK
1 EA
WALL STOP
HARDWARE SET NO. 11
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
ENTRANCE LOCK
1 EA
WALL STOP
HARDWARE SET NO. 12
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
PRIVACY LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 EA
WALL STOP
HARDWARE SET NO. 13
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
1 EA
OH STOP
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
Project #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
08 71 01 – Page 3
HARDWARE SET NO. 14
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA
HINGE
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
1 EA
WALL STOP
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND70PD SPA
WS406/407CVX
652
626
630
IVE
SCH
IVE
END OF HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Project #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
08 71 01 – Page 4
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass.
B.
Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
B.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Frames: Glazed borrowed lites.
C.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.
ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
E.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012.
F.
ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.
G.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
H.
ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2012a.
I.
ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010.
J.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
K.
GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
L.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
B.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics,
limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation
methods.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including
replacement of failed units.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
A.
Type A - Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing:
1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: D-H-T-90, minimum.
2. Safety Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
3. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in fire doors.
b. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire
rating.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
B.
Type B - Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc: www.us.agc.com.
2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com.
3. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com.
4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na.
5. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.
6. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load
design regardless of specified thickness.
C.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration as required to achieve indicated
ratings.
1. IBC Fire Resistance Rating: W-60.
2. Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek Warnock Hersey.
3. Safety Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
4. Products:
a. Technical Glass Products; Pilkington Pyrostop: www.fireglass.com.
b. SAFTI FIRST, a division of O'Keeffe's Inc; SuperLite II-XL: www.safti.com.
c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America; Contraflam: www.vetrotechusa.com.
d. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
D.
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration as required to achieve indicated ratings.
1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: As indicated on drawings.
2. Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek Warnock Hersey.
3. Safety Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
4. Labeling: Provide permanent label on each piece giving the IBC rating and other information required
by the applicable code.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
5.
"T-Rated" Products: Where D-H-T-90 or D-H-T-60 rating is indicated, provide one of the following
products:
a. Technical Glass Products; Pilkington Pyrostop: www.fireglass.com.
b. SAFTI FIRST, a division of O'Keeffe's Inc; SuperLite II-XL: www.safti.com.
c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America; Contraflam: www.vetrotechusa.com.
d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America; Keralite ULTRA: www.vetrotechusa.com.
e. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
5. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife grade
consistency; grey color.
C.
Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness
of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.
D.
Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
12-1/2, Uses M and A; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
E.
Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type
S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35; color as selected.
F.
Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties;
non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A
hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.07 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch
for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height
to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch
long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A
durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D.
Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides,
maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, designed for compression of 25 percent to effect an air
barrier and vapor retarder seal.
E.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864
Option I; Gray color.
F.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
G.
Smoke Removal Unit Targets: Adhesive targets affixed to glass to identify glass units intended for removal
for smoke control.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede
moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 3
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.
E.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
D.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
E.
Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.
F.
Knife trim protruding tape.
3.04 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A.
Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24
inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line.
B.
Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips.
C.
Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to
straight line.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A.
Hollow Steel Frames - Interior:
1. Fire-Rated Openings: Type A, ¼ inch thick.
2. Non-Fire-Rated Openings: Type B, ¼ inch thick.
F.
Flush Wood Doors:
1. Fire-rated: Type A, ¼ inch thick.
2. Non-Fire-Rated Openings: Type B, ¼ inch thick.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 09 05 61
EXISTING FLOORING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of
floor coverings:
1. Resilient tile and sheet.
2. Broadloom carpet.
3. Carpet tile.
4. Sealed concrete.
B.
Preparation of existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C.
Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B.
Section 03 39 01 – Curing, Sealing and Hardening Concrete Floors.
C.
Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring.
D.
Section 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting.
E.
Section 09 68 80 - Carpet - Adhered.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011.
B.
ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor
Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011.
C.
ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in
situ Probes; 2011.
D.
RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor
Covering Institute; October 2011.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate scheduling of the Work with the Owner to verify that alternate building egress routes are in
place.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Visual Observation Report: For existing floor coverings to be removed.
B.
Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of
substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:
1. Moisture and pH limits and test methods.
2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
C.
Testing Agency's Report: Include:
1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.
2. Summary of conditions encountered.
3. Moisture and pH test reports.
4. Copies of specified test methods.
5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.
6. Submit report directly to Owner.
7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.
D.
Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
E.
Copy of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
EXISTING FLOORING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
09 05 61 - Page 1
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Moisture and pH testing will be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner.
B.
Moisture and pH testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by
Contractor.
C.
Contractor may perform adhesive and bond test with his own personnel or hire a testing agency.
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified.
1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with project
Owner's project contact information.
E.
Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:
1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.
2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.
3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.
4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.
5. Notify Owner when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will start.
F.
Remedial Coating Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in
this section, trained by or employed by coating manufacturer, and able to provide at least 3 project
references showing at least 3 years' experience installing moisture emission coatings.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.
B.
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging; include installation instructions.
C.
Keep materials from freezing.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48
hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B.
Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours
prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and
compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring
manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering,
and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges.
2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited.
3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
B.
Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the
moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring
manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and
floor covering and for conditions present.
C.
Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its
manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's
emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further
treatment.
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, maximum.
2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those.
EXISTING FLOORING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
09 05 61 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.
Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX MC ULTRA, with ARDEX FEATHERFINISH:
www.ardexamericas.com.
b. Floor Seal Technology, Inc; MES 100, with ARDEX K-15 or Mapei Ultraplan 1 Plus:
www.floorseal.com.
c. Koster American Corporation; Koster VAP I 2000, with Koster SL Premium overlay:
www.kosterusa.com.
d. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Moisture Guard Max: www.prospec.com.
e. Sika Corporation; Sikafloor Moisture Tolerance Epoxy Primer and Sikafloor Self-Leveling
Moisture Tolerant Resurfacer: www.sikafloorusa.com.
f.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS
A.
Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work
Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering being removed.
B.
Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A.
Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers,
film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and
other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B.
Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING
A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this
specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this
section.
C.
Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.
D.
Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as those
methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated.
In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square
feet per 24 hours.
F.
Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.04 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING
A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this
specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this
section.
C.
Test in accordance with ASTM F2170 Procedure A and as follows.
D.
Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the specified ASTM
test method, as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM test values and do not quantify the
moisture content sufficiently.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated.
In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value exceeds 75 percent relative
humidity.
F.
Report: Report the information required by the test method.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
EXISTING FLOORING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
09 05 61 - Page 3
3.05 PH TESTING
A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this
specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the Contractor's
convenience.
C.
Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.
D.
Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in
diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paper into the water,
remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated.
In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over 10.
3.06 PREPARATION
A.
See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
C.
Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other
irregularities with patching compound.
D.
Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.07 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.08 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
3.09 PROTECTION
A.
Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.
END OF SECTION
EXISTING FLOORING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
09 05 61 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 09 05 62
EXISTING WALL COVERING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
This section applies to all walls identified in the Drawings to have existing wall coverings removed and
walls prepared for new finishes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govern all painting work:
1.
Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI), including
Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and Approved Product List.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate scheduling of the Work with the Owner to verify that alternate building egress routes are in
place.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall show proof
before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of workers throughout the duration of
the work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.
B.
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging; include installation instructions.
C.
Keep materials from freezing.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48
hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B.
Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours
prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Clean potable water.
B.
Softening gel or liquid.
C.
Scoring and perforating tools.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors, frames,
equipment, piping, etc., from removal operations and damage with plastic sheeting, shields, masking,
templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide
such protection.
3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING WALL COVERINGS
A.
Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of Master Painters Institute (MPI),
as applicable to wall covering being removed and preparation of existing wall surfaces for paint.
B.
Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified.
C.
Score or perforate existing wall covering.
D.
Dampen entire area of wall covering scheduled for removal using commercial gel or liquid products or
warm water.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
EXISTING WALL COVERING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
09 05 62 - Page 1
1.
E.
Allow dampened areas to absorb liquids for a minimum of one (1) hour.
Using a wide blade knife, begin removal at the ceiling and carefully begin pulling wall covering away from
wall surface while maintaining pressure behind the covering with the scraper.
1.
After removal of the majority of wall covering materials, use a damp sponge and cleaning solution to
thoroughly remove all adhesives from the wall surfaces.
F.
Following the complete removal of all wall covering material, allow the wall surfaces to dry for 24 hours.
G.
When wall surfaces have dried, lightly sand the entire wall to remove any residual wall covering material
and adhesive.
H.
Inspect the wall surfaces thoroughly and notify the General Contractor of any blemishes, cavities, gouges,
cracks, etc. so that patching can be performed.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Remove all protective sheeting and masking and clean floors of dust, solvents, residual adhesive,
adhesive removers, mold, mildew, and other materials.
B.
Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
END OF SECTION
EXISTING WALL COVERING REMOVAL AND PREPARATION
09 05 62 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B.
Metal stud wall framing.
C.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
D.
Gypsum wallboard.
E.
Joint treatment and accessories.
F.
Acoustic insulation.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members;
American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
C.
ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for
Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
F.
ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board; 2012.
G.
ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board; 2004 (Reapproved
2009)e1.
H.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.
I.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
J.
ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached
Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
K.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
L.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products
or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011.
M. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
N.
ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base;
2010a.
O.
ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing;
2013.
P.
ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing
Panel; 2013.
Q.
ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013.
R.
ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets;
2008b.
S.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2013.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - Page 1
T.
ASTM C1629/C1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel
Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
U.
ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2013.
V.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings
in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
W. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
X.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
Y.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
Z.
GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 2008.
AA. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
D.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.
E.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance
with requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with
minimum five years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
B.
Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests
conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.
B.
Partition Wall Studs: Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components; ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet
steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with
maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.
1. Thickness: 20 gauge.
2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
C.
Studs and Headers at Wall Openings: Heavy-duty, ASTM A653/A 653M:
1. Thickness: 16 gauge.
2. Dimensions:
a. Jambs: 3-5/8 x 3 x 2-1/16 x 3/4 inch
b. Headers: 6 x 3 x 2-1/4 x 3/4 inch.
3. Header Brackets: 14 gauge, 3-1/2 x 3-1/16 x 2 inch.
D.
Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
E.
Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
F.
Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate
deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while
maintaining structural performance of partition.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by
applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design
of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.
3.
4.
5.
Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized
coating.
Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems of fire
rating and movement required.
Deflection and Firestop Track:
a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while
maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) "Posi Clip" by Fire Trak Corporation.
2) "The System" by Metal-Lite, Inc.
Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on
drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.
3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.
4. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC: www.temple.com.
5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
B.
Type A Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested
assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
3. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings and Bulkheads: 5/8 inch.
c. Curved Surfaces: Use 3/8” wetted gypsum board first layer with dry ¼” gypsum board on
outside surface.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, rock or slag fiber; Type I, friction fit type, unfaced.
Thickness: 3-1/2 inch.
B.
Material:
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of 450 or
less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
4. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
5. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
6. Facing: Unfaced.
7. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
C.
Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board.
D.
Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed
panel edges.
3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories:
a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.
E.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.
1. Glass-Mat Faced Drywall Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as
otherwise indicated.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - Page 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
Paper-Faced Drywall Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as
otherwise indicated.
Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.
Skim-Coating Compound:
a. Chemical hardening type compound.
******OR******
High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take
the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
F.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to
Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
G.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill
screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
H.
Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit
application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
I.
Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to
surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and
rigidly fastening insulation in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 16 inches on center.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.
C.
Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.
1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance
between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging.
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of
studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs
unattached to track.
D.
Openings: Reinforce openings as specified above for weight of doors or operable panels, using special
shapes.
E.
Standard Wall Furring: Install at steel columns scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches
from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24
inches on center.
1. Orientation: Horizontal.
2. Spacing: As indicated.
F.
Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing
members.
G.
Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600
requirements.
H.
Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:
1. Wall mounted supports.
2. Wall mounted cabinets.
3. Plumbing fixtures.
4. Toilet partitions.
5. Toilet accessories.
6. Wall-mounted shelving.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and
mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B.
Retain insulation batts in place with spindle fasteners at 12 inches on center.
C.
Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed.
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.
Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
3.05 JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with powder-type vinyl-based joint compound
and finished with powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.
B.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically
indicated.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed
construction.
C.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive
finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
D.
Where Level 5 finish is indicated, skim-coat entire surface after have been properly treated; achieve a flat
and tool mark-free finish.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any
direction.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - Page 5
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
B.
Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
C.
Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
B.
ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2008.
C.
ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2011.
D.
ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.
E.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components, acoustical units, and accessories.
B.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Acoustical Units: 80 sq ft of each type and size.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL for the fire resistance indicated.
B.
Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to,
during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
3. USG: www.usg.com.
B.
Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
1. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire-resistive
assembly the suspension system is a part of.
C.
Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 24 x 48 inches.
Job #14011
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Copyright THA 062314
09 51 00 - Page 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Thickness: 5/8 inches.
Composition: Wet felted.
Light Reflectance: 82 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
NRC Range: 50 to 60, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 33, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
Edge: Reveal edge.
Surface Pattern: Geometric-scored; Non-directional fissured – create 2’ x 2’ tile “look”.
Product:
a. "CORTEGA SECOND LOOK" manufactured by Armstrong World Industries:
www.armstrong.com.
b. "BAROQUE CUSTOMLINE" manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation: www.bpb-na.com.
c. "RADAR CLIMAPLUS ILLUSION" manufactured by USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Same as for acoustical units.
B.
Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components,
with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
C.
Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 9/16 inch wide face.
2. Construction: Double web.
3. Finish: White painted.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system
flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
2. At Concealed Grid: Provide exposed L-shaped molding.
C.
Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of
1:360.
C.
Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
D.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
E.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
F.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed
deflection capability.
H.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support
components independently.
I.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
J.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other
interruptions.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1.
2.
Use longest practical lengths.
Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
G.
Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
H.
Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - Page 3
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient tile flooring.
C.
Resilient base.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and
floors.
B.
Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of
concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
C.
Section 09 68 00 - Carpeting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; 2010e1.
B.
ASTM F970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit; 2007 (Reapproved 2011).
C.
ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved 2010)e1.
D.
ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004 (Reapproved
2009).
E.
ASTM F1344 - Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile; 2012.
F.
ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile; 2013a.
G.
ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.
H.
ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004 (Reapproved
2010).
I.
ASTM F2034 - Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
J.
ASTM F2169 - Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads; 2012.
K.
ASTM F2195 - Standard Specification for Linoleum Floor Tile; 2013.
L.
BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant
Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.
M. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
N.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
B.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Design Professional's initial
selection.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Flooring Material: 35 square feet of each type and color.
2. Extra Wall Base: 12 linear feet of each type and color.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - Page 1
B.
Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70
degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE FLOORING
A.
Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and:
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified.
2. Size: 12 x 12 inch.
3. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
4. Pattern: Marbleized.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product "NATURAL CREATIONS #TP509":
www.armstrong.com.
b. No substitutions.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Vinyl, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows:
1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
2. Height: 4 inch.
3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
4. Finish: Satin.
5. Length: Roll.
6. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.
b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.
c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.
Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the
more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area
Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.
C.
Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
D.
Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer
and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 05 61.
B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
RESILIENT FLOORING
Job #14011
09 65 00 - Page 2
Copyright THA 062314
C.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
D.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
E.
Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Fit joints tightly.
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F.
Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under
centerline of door.
G.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.
1. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive.
H.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.
I.
At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern.
3.04 TILE FLOORING
A.
Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's
instructions say otherwise.
B.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.
3.05 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B.
Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.
C.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - Page 3
SECTION 09 68 13
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpet tile, loose laid with edges and control grid adhered.
B.
Matching roll carpet for direct glue installation on base.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and
floors.
B.
Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of
concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering
Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
B.
ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; 2010e1.
C.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
D.
CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute;
Current Edition.
E.
NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints, direction of carpet pile and location of edge moldings.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C.
Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum
three years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five years experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Interface, Inc: www.interfaceinc.com.
2. Substitutions not permitted.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Carpet Tile:
1. Product: “STROLL” manufactured by Interface, Inc.
a. Style: “FAST LANE #19BN300”
2. Tile Size: 50 cm x 50 cm, nominal.
3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or
NFPA 253.
4. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
5. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - Page 1
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B.
Edge Strips: Vinyl, color as selected.
C.
Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum
VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing
compliance is acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are
ready to receive carpet tile.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive
materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation
by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer
and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects
with sub-floor filler.
C.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D.
Vacuum clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
C.
Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D.
Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E.
Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines.
F.
Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
G.
Adhere carpet tile to substrate along centerline of rooms, at perimeter of rooms, where tiles are cut, and at
15 foot intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of tile dry over substrate.
H.
Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
I.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing
equipment.
2. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed
ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment,
unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including
that which is factory-finished.
d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible
through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match
face panels.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment.
5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.
6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.
7. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
8. Ceramic and other tiles.
9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.
10. Glass.
11. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 05 62 – Existing Wall Covering Removal and Preparation.
A.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Color coding scheme for items to be
painted under this section.
B.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Color coding scheme for items to be painted under
this section.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
B.
The terms "Latex" and/or "Acrylic Latex", when used in this Specification Manual, shall refer to paint that is
stabilized with Acrylic Resin and shall be universally defined within these Documents as "100% Acrylic
Resin". Vinyl Acrylic paints are not acceptable.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2012.
C.
ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - Page 1
D.
SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings;
Fourth Edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g.
"alkyd enamel").
D.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's paper chip samples illustrating range of colors and textures available for
each surface finishing product scheduled.
E.
Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system
selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on coated card stock, 8 x 10 inch in size.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color and type; store where directed.
2. Label each container with color and type in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum
three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five
years experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for
mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F,
in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates,
moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior;
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer.
B.
Paints:
1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
2. Substitutions not permitted.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying
or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions
of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade
lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single
production run.
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
5.
Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other
method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon
compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl
phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl
ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene),
1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
E.
Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
F.
Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
1. Selection to be made by Design Professional after award of contract.
2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they
are mounted on/under.
3. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to the
color coding scheme indicated.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A.
Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
B.
Ferrous Metals, Primed, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
C.
Galvanized Metals, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A.
Existing Painted Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
2. Semi-gloss: One coat of acrylic latex enamel.
G.
Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
H.
Existing Painted Ferrous Metals, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
I.
Ferrous Metals, Primed, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with latex primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
J.
Galvanized Metals, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - Page 3
2.
Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
K.
Gypsum Board/Plaster, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of primer sealer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
3. Eggshell: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
4. Flat: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
L.
Existing Painted Gypsum Board/Plaster, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
2. Eggshell: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
3. Flat: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and
clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not;
commercial quality.
B.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
C.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may
potentially affect proper application.
D.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Design Professional of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
E.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless
moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
D.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder,
and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and
allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium
metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after
repair.
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
I.
Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching
plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
J.
Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
K.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply
coat of etching primer.
L.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or
SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
M. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter,
dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld
joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
N.
Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
D.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
E.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
G.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Design Professional will provide field inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove
daily from site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
A.
Concrete, Concrete Block Masonry: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
B.
Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior Ceilings and Bulkheads: Acrylic latex, flat.
2. Interior Walls: Acrylic latex, eggshell.
C.
Wood Doors: Factory-finished.
D.
Steel Door Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
E.
Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Exterior: Acrylic latex, gloss; finish all surfaces, including concealed surfaces, before installation.
2. Interior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
F.
Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Exterior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
2. Interior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
G.
Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Finish the following items:
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - Page 5
2.
3.
J.
a. Mechanical equipment.
b. Electrical equipment.
Exterior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
Interior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
Pipe and Duct Insulation Jackets: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; flat.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 10 14 00
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Room and door signs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final
Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities;
International Code Council; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font,
foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
B.
Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including
room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors.
1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room
number on schedule.
2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner
through Design Professional at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit
preliminary schedule.
3. Submit for approval by Owner through Design Professional prior to fabrication.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating
sign style, font, and method of attachment.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
B.
Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.
C.
Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Flat Signs:
1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.
2. Cosco Industries: www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.
3. InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com.
4. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.
6. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
7. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible Design and
ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting
requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.
B.
Room and Door Signs: Include a sign for 35 rooms.
1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SIGNAGE
10 14 00 - Page 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.
Character Height: 1 inch.
Sign Dimensions: 6 x 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the
drawings.
Treatment Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the
drawings.
Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on
the drawings.
Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the words, “UNISEX TOILET", room numbers to be determined
later, and braille.
Interior Directional and Informational Signs:
1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs.
2.03 SIGN TYPES
A.
B.
Provide sign panel consisting of a top layer of .060" sheet, .010" clear polycarbonate sheet and a back
layer of .060" sheet. Top layer is cut and bonded to clear sheet to create window. Clear sheet is bonded to
back layer with space to allow changeable insert to slide behind clear sheet. Top layer is engraved to
receive additional .060" sheet that is cut and adhered to the top layer to create signage.
1. Edges: Square.
2. Corners: Radiused.
3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Silastic adhesive.
Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.
2. Character Case: Upper and lower case (title case).
3. Background Color: As scheduled.
4. Character Color: Contrasting color.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal.
B.
Adhesive: Silastic Adhesive Mounting (SAM).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
C.
Locate signs where indicated:
1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above
finished floor.
2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.
D.
Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
END OF SECTION
SIGNAGE
10 14 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Accessories for toilet rooms, lab, treatment rooms, kitchenette, utility rooms, and lounge.
B.
Grab bars.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final
Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products; 2013.
C.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service; 2013.
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
F.
ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium
and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011e1.
G.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
H.
ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008.
I.
ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for
Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B.
Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products listed are made by Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com.
2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc: www.bobrick.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors
and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B.
Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.
C.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D.
Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
E.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.
F.
Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical
characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.
Job #14011
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
Copyright THA 062314
10 28 00 - Page 1
G.
Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
H.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
2.03 FINISHES
A.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked
enamel.
D.
Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous metal and
fastening devices.
E.
Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
F.
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets,
spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll.
B.
Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, surface-mounted, with viewing slots on sides
as refill indicator and tumbler lock.
1. Capacity: 400 multifold minimum.
C.
Roll Paper Towel Dispenser: Surface-mounted, die-cast aluminum; Controlled delivery.
1. Capacity: One (1) standard core paper towel roll.
D.
Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and horizontal
stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator,
tumbler lock.
1. Minimum Capacity: 48 ounces.
E.
Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.
1. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof
hanging system; No.4 finish.
2. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler
material.
Coat Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, double-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for
concealed attachment, satin finish.
F.
G.
Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish.
1. Heavy Duty Grab Bars: Floor supports are acceptable if necessary to achieve load rating.
a. Push/Pull Point Load: Minimum 1000 pound-force, minimum.
b. Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.125 inch wall thickness, exposed flange
mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.
c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2. Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from ASTM A 554
stainless steel tubing, Type 304, 18-8 alloy; each end heliarc-welded to minimum 11 gage stainless
steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish.
2.05 LAVATORY PIPE INSULATION KITS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. IPS Corporation: www.truebro.com.
B.
Product: "TRUEBRO® LAV GUARD® 2"
C.
Insulation: Molded closed cell vinyl, UV and heat resistant; minimum 1/8 inch wall thickness.
D.
Fasteners: Nylon, supplied by kit manufacturer.
E.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be considered if
the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.06 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel.
1. Holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders.
2. Length: 36 inches.
3. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
3.05 SCHEDULE
A.
Items listed below are identified by Bradley Corporation catalog numbers to set quality standards.
Equivalent by specified acceptable manufacturers may be considered.
B.
TAS-1 EACH OF THE FOLLOWING ROOMS TO HAVE:
C.
1.
Unisex – 109
2.
Unisex – 116
3.
Unisex – 120
4.
Unisex – 146
1
Grab Bar
812-7 x 42 x 899-013
1
Grab Bar
812-7 x 36 x 899-014 x 899-015
1
Grab Bar
812-7 x 18 x 899-013
1
Toilet Tissue Dispenser
5224
1
Paper Towel Dispenser
250-15
1
Soap Dispenser
6562
1
Mirror
780 (36” x 40”)
1
Coat Hook
9134 (Back of door)
1
Lavatory Pipe Insulation Kit
TAS-2 EACH OF THE FOLLOWING ROOMS TO HAVE:
1.
Kitchenette – 110
2.
Employee Lounge – 118
3.
Laundry - 119
1
Roll Paper Towel Dispenser
259
1
Soap Dispenser
6562
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - Page 3
D.
E.
TAS-3 LAB-134 TO HAVE:
1
Paper Towel Dispenser
250-15
1
Soap Dispenser
6562
TAS-4 JANITORS-145 TO HAVE:
1
F.
Mop and Broom Holder
9953
TAS-5 EACH TREATMENT ROOM (11 TOTAL) TO HAVE:
1
Paper Towel Dispenser
250-15
END OF SECTION
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fire extinguishers.
B.
Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
B.
UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall
bracket mounted measurements, location, and accessories.
D.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details, and
accessories.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers:
1. Ansul, Inc; Red Line: www.ansul.com.
2. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com.
3. Strike First Corporation of America: www.strikefirstusa.com.
B.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com.
2. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.
4. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.
5. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com.
6. Strike First Corporation of America: www.strikefirstusa.com.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes,
whichever is more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.
B.
Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Cartridge Operated: Spun shell.
2. Stored Pressure Operated: Deep Drawn.
3. Class: A:B:C.
4. Size: 10 pound.
5. Size and classification as scheduled.
6. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A.
Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 - Page 1
B.
Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type.
1. Sized to accommodate accessories.
2. Exterior nominal dimensions of 10 inch wide x 19 inch high x 5-1/2 inch deep.
3. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch projection.
4. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door
stiles.
C.
Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with
two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.
D.
Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick acrylic. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.
E.
Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
F.
Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
G.
Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
H.
Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 32 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet.
C.
Secure rigidly in place.
D.
Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets:
1.
Common Corridor-105: One (1).
2.
Corridor-123: One (1).
B. Wall-Mounted Fire Extinguishers:
1.
Janitors-145: One (1).
2.
Mechanical-106: One (1).
3.
Mechanical-128: One (1).
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 10 57 01
WARDROBE COAT RACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Aluminum, wall mounted coat racks.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for attachment.
B.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheet with complete description of units including fabrication
data.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, location, lengths and type of each coat rack unit, accessories, and
anchorage details.
C.
Samples: Submit sample charts illustrating full range of colors available for each finish material specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. EMCO Industries, Inc.
2. Magnuson Group
3. Design Professional approved equivalent.
B.
Wall Brackets: Die-Formed and welded box construction steel arm and back plate, minimum 18 gauge;
powder coated.
C.
Wall Standards: 16 gauge 'U' channels with molded plastic end closures; powder coated.
D.
Number of Shelves: One, with hanger bar.
E.
Shelf Bars: Clear anodized aluminum tube, 18 gauge, 3/4 inch square; capped at each end if exposed.
F.
Hanger Bar: Steel tube, one (1) inch diameter; 18 gauge chrome-plated; capped at each end.
G.
Hangers: Nickel plated steel of 3/16" wire, shaped, and securely formed to take maximum abuse; 1-1/2"
closed hook.
H.
Number of Hangers: Provide 5 per foot of hanger bar.
I.
Mounting Hardware: As supplied by manufacturer for type of wall construction present.
2.02 FINISHES
A.
Aluminum Components: Anodized, clear color.
B.
Steel Components: Powder coated; color to be selected by Design Professional.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Verify that building conditions are ready to receive coat rack units.
B.
Verify that blocking is properly located in stud partition walls.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Install coat racks level and plumb. Securely anchored to wall.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
WARDROBE COAT RACKS
10 57 01 - Page 1
SECTION 12 21 16
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Vertical louver blinds at all exterior window locations.
1.
All storefront glazing is excluded.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers
Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1)
B.
NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; National Fire
Protection Association; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate headrail location, headrail attachment, and operation direction.
C.
Selection Samples: For vanes, color chips or material samples representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors and patterns.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Vanes: Five (5) of each type and size.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with
not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum 5 years of
documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
If blinds are delivered early and stored at the project, deliver in unopened containers; handle and store in
such a manner to protect them from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Vertical Louver Blinds:
1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com.
2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com.
3. Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com.
4. The same manufacturer as for horizontal blinds, to obtain match.
5. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS
A.
Vertical Louver Blinds: Horizontal travel, vertical louver units complete with tracks, pivot and traversing
mechanisms, and accessories, as follows:
1. Louvers: Fabric in-fill PVC louver blades of the size indicated.
2. Direction of Travel: Draw back to left.
3. Mounting: Inside (between jambs).
4. Cord and Chain Operation: Comply with WCMA A100.1.
B.
Tracks: Channel tracks as required for type of operation, extruded aluminum with clear anodized finish,
with end caps.
1. Dimensions: Manufacturer's standard, selected for suitability for installation conditions, span, and
weight of louvers.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
12 21 16 - Page 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Louver Rotation: Chain driven direct rotation by activating tilt gear within end cap assembly in turn
actuating tilt rod and worm-and-spur gears in carrier trucks.
Operating Components: Internally mounted heavy-duty extruded aluminum tilt rod, louver carriers,
and other components required for proper performance and designed for smooth, quiet, trouble free
operation.
Pivot Mechanism: Geared for synchronous 180 degrees rotation of louver blades and type of
operation indicated.
Louver Carriers: Metal carriers with ball-bearing wheels or thermoplastic trucks, equipped with
linkages or other devices to ensure positive spacing of louver blades.
Tilt Chain: Nickel plated brass beaded ball chain, minimum 1/8 inch diameter; locate at drawback side
of units as indicated.
C.
PVC Vanes: Integrally colored, extruded PVC; flat, 2 inches (50mm) wide.
1. Thickness: 0.030 inch, minimum.
2. Flammability: Comply with NFPA 701.
3. Color: As selected by Design Professional from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
4. Color: Match louver color specified for horizontal blinds, subject to approval of Design Professional.
5. Texture: Smooth.
6. Light and Privacy: Provide perforations or other design features to achieve light and privacy
equivalent to Level Two (2) as defined herein.
a. Acceptance of light and privacy characteristics are subject to Design Professional's final approval
of mock-up.
D.
Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for the mounting configuration and
span indicated; provide manufacturer’s standard L- bracket with clip for outside mounting and clip only for
inside mounting.
E.
Valances: To match louver design and color.
1. Style: As selected by Design Professional from blind manufacturer’s full selection.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B.
Fabricate blinds to fit openings within specified tolerances.
1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom of vanes and
finish floor.
2. Horizontal Dimensions - Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb.
C.
Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate blinds to within plus/minus 1/8 inch of intended dimensions.
D.
At openings requiring continuous multiple blind units with separate tracks, locate track joints at window
mullion centers; butt tracks end-to-end.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not start installation before openings are finished and all finishes have been completed; do not install
until painting is completed.
B.
Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.
C.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Design Professional of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
D.
Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
E.
Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
B.
Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds.
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
12 21 16 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using mounting style as indicated.
B.
Installation Tolerances:
1. Inside Mounting: Maximum space between vane and jamb when closed of 1/16 inch.
2. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch.
C.
Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
D.
Replace blinds that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed work to like-new condition.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
12 21 16 - Page 3
SECTION 20 00 00
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
General Requirements specifically applicable to Division 21, 22, and 23.
B.
This Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, tools, construction
equipment and machinery, transportation, and all services required for the execution, completion and
operation of all mechanical systems, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in
the Work.
1.02 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with conditions which will affect work that is to be
performed. Submission of a proposal by this Contractor shall be conclusive evidence that this Contractor
has visited the site and has given proper consideration and evaluation of these conditions in preparation of
his proposal. No allowance shall be made to the Contractor for extra expense incurred due to neglect to
properly make this visit and examination.
B.
Where active sewers, gas, electric or other services are encountered during performance of this contract,
Contractor shall protect, brace and support them as required. Do not prevent, interrupt or disturb operation
of existing services that are to remain. Relocate existing services as required.
C.
Drawings show approximate locations of existing utilities. Contractor shall verify exact location of services
which they may expect to encounter.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02 41 00 - Demolition.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
C.
Section 07 50 01 - Roof Restoration.
D.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
E.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
F.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
G.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
H.
Section 10 28 13 - Toilet Accessories.
I.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
All work shall be installed in accordance with applicable local and state regulations, including but not
limited to the following:
1. Plumbing work shall be done in accordance with plumbing code of the State of Michigan, local
regulations, codes, and ordinances, and any other codes or regulations having legal jurisdiction in the
area.
2. Mechanical work shall be done in accordance with applicable Standards and all State, Federal and
local codes, regulations or ordinances which may legally apply in the area.
3. In the event Drawings and Specifications conflict with applicable rules, regulations or codes, said
rules, regulations and codes shall govern Contractor. Should any change in Drawings and/or
Specifications be required to comply with rules, regulations or codes, Contractor shall notify Design
Professional, in writing, before entering into contract. After entering into contract, all work shall be
completed without addition to contract amount. Any changes in the work to secure certificates shall be
made by Contractor at his own expense.
4. Standards of Industry: Reference to industry standards where applicable:
a. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
b. AGA - American Gas Association
c. ASA - American Standards Association
d. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
e. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - Page 1
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association
NBFU - National Board of Fire Underwriters
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
AWWA - American Water Works Association
FIA - Factory Insurance Association
FM - Factory Mutual Insurance Companies
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc.
Local and State Codes
National Plumbing Codes
State of Michigan Boiler Act of 1965 and Board of Boiler Rules
Michigan Barrier Free Design Graphics Manual
PDI - Plumbing Drainage Institute
1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Contractor shall file approval forms when required, obtain and pay for all required permits, pay all required
deposits, arrange for and pay for all required or necessary inspections.
B.
Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections in keeping with project progress to prevent
unnecessary delays. Upon completion of the project, Contractor shall submit all final inspection certificates
to Design Professional for Owner's file.
1.06 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate fully with all other Contractors and trades to assure efficient and orderly sequence of
installation of interdependent systems and system elements.
B.
Installation shall be made so that all component parts function together as a workable system, which shall
be complete with all accessories necessary for proper operation. When installation is complete, all
equipment shall be operative and in proper adjustment. All work shall be executed in conformity with the
best practice so as to contribute to efficiency of operation, minimum maintenance, accessibility and
aesthetics.
C.
Contractor shall consult Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature, and specifications for all
trades to determine nature and extent of work specified in other sections which adjoins or attaches to their
work.
D.
Contractor shall confer with other Contractors and Subcontractors at the site to coordinate the work in view
of job conditions so that interferences may be eliminated and maximum head room and clearance may be
obtained.
E.
In the event that interferences develop, Design Professional's decision will be final as to which trade shall
relocate its work and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of pipes, ductwork or
equipment to clear such interferences.
F.
Cutting, patching and painting resulting from this Contractor's improper location or coordination of the work
shall be done by Contractor who originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear
expenses.
G.
Contractor is responsible for providing and installing any access panels or doors which may be required to
provide access to valves, controls, fittings, etc. that are installed behind permanent walls, ceilings,
bulkheads, soffits or floors.
1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for work and coordinate pipe, duct, and equipment
locations with other trades.
B.
All major patching and repairing of work caused by this Contractor shall be done by Contractor who
originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear expenses.
C.
No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be done without written permission from the Design
Professional.
D.
Provide fire stops for all mechanical openings in fire rated surfaces. Seal space between sleeves and pipes
with approved fire proofing material. Integrity of system shall be maintained to the rating of the item
pierced.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1.08 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the
contract. Drawings are not to be scaled nor serve as Shop Drawings.
B.
Drawings show design intent and this Contractor shall field check dimensions, actual locations, distances
and levels will be governed by actual field conditions and variations in equipment being provided.
C.
Contractor shall follow Drawings in laying out work and checking Drawings of other trades to verify spaces
in which work will be installed. Where headroom or space conditions are inadequate, Design Professional
shall be notified before proceeding with installation.
D.
Items not specifically mentioned in Specifications or noted on Drawings, but which are obviously necessary
to make a complete working installation shall be included at no extra cost to the Owner.
E.
If directed by Design Professional, this Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable
modifications in layout as needed to prevent conflicts with work of other trades or for proper execution of
work.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A.
Design Professional will not be responsible for errors in quantities, dimensions to fit job conditions, details
of fabrication to insure proper assembly at job site, or for errors resulting from mistakes in Submittals even
though reviewed.
B.
Responsibility for these items rests with Contractor and his Suppliers.
C.
Any equipment used by the Contractor that is not specifically shown on drawings is considered alternate
equipment and all additional installation costs incurred by the use of this equipment shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
1.10 EQUIPMENT
A.
Only substitutions made by addendum, prior to receipt of bids, will be binding.
B.
After Award of Contract substitutions will only be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through
no fault of this Contractor.
C.
Where equipment manufacturer's names are listed, they are listed not only to indicate an acceptable
manufacturer, but further to insure providing a certain quality, a feature, or other item of design not
specifically mentioned in the detailed description.
D.
Where Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified or detailed on the Drawings,
which requires any redesign of structure, partitions, foundations, wiring or any other part of mechanical,
electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new Drawings and detailing required therefore,
shall be prepared by this Contractor at their own expense.
E.
Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of piping, ductwork and
equipment from that specified or indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings, Contractor shall furnish and
install any such piping, ductwork, etc., and any other additional equipment required by system at no
additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall also be responsible for electrical and other trade work not
mentioned above upon such equipment substitution.
1.11 CLEANING AND FINISHING
A.
All piping, insulation, unfinished iron work, fixtures and equipment shall be cleaned at completion of Work.
B.
Two (2) weeks after turning systems over to Owner, all strainers, filters, and automatic controls shall be
cleaned and checked.
C.
Owner shall be instructed on system operations and maintenance, including lubrication, filter replacement
or cleaning, seasonal change over as required, control operation, and such other information as
necessary.
1.12 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
A.
Contractor shall guarantee all of their work and the work of their subcontractors to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the work, unless a
longer period is stipulated under specific headings, and shall repair or replace at no additional cost to
Owner any material or equipment developing defects and shall also make good any damage caused by
such defects or the correction of defects. Repairs or replacements shall be guaranteed for one year, dated
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - Page 3
from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement. This replacement shall be binding even though it
will exceed product guarantees normally furnished by some manufacturers.
B.
Contractor shall submit their own and each equipment manufacturer’s written certificates, warrantying that
each such item of equipment furnished complies with all requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Note that guarantee shall run from date of final acceptance of the work, NOT from date of installation of a
device or piece of equipment.
END OF SECTION
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Preparation and painting of fire protection piping systems.
B.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Piping identification.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
B.
ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.
C.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
D.
ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
E.
ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engine ers; 2013
(ANSI/ASME B16.5).
F.
ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2012.
G.
ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011.
H.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
I.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
J.
ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
K.
ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2004.
L.
ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
M. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless; 2012.
N.
ASTM A135/A135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe; 2009.
O.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2013.
P.
ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2009).
Q.
ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded
and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2013.
R.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
S.
ASTM B75/B75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2011.
T.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
U.
ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.
V.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.
W. AWWA C110/A21.10 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. Through
48 In. (75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids; American Water Works Association; 2012.
X.
AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water
Works Association; 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - Page 1
Y.
AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association;
2009 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
Z.
AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA C606).
AA. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2013.
AB. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2013.
AC. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances; National
Fire Protection Association; 1995.
AD. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
AE. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
AF. UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals.
Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Conform to UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey requirements.
C.
Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve
body.
D.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A.
Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.
B.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.
2.02 BURIED PIPING
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 or ASTM A795 Standard Weight, black, with AWWA C105
polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; with double layer, half-lapped polyethylene
tape.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings.
3. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1.
4. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation.
B.
Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A795 Schedule 10, ASME B36.10M Schedule 5, ASTM A53 Schedule 40, ASTM A 135
Schedule 10, ASTM A 135 UL listed light wall type, or ASTM A 795 Schedule 40, black ( galvanized for dry
pipe systems).
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.25, buttweld ends.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A 47/A 47M.
4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped
elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring pocked and
O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.
B.
Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped
composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.
E.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
F.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel
support.
H.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.05 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
A.
Rigid Mechanical Couplings for Grooved Joints:
1. Dimensions and Testing: Comply with AWWA C606.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 300 psig.
3. Housing Material: Fabricate of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.
4. Housing Coating: Factory applied orange enamel.
5. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees F to 230
degrees F.
6. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc electroplated steel
7. Provide stops for direct stab installation without field assembly.
8. Product:
a. Victaulic Company; FireLock Style 009H: www.victaulic.com.
2.06 GATE VALVES
A.
Up to and including 2 inches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
b. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
d. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
e. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
f.
Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
g. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.
B.
Over 2 inches:
1. Manufacturers:
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - Page 3
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
C.
Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, handwheel, OS&Y, solid
rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged or grooved ends.
Over 4 inches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
b. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
d. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
e. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
f.
Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
g. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron
body indicator post assembly.
2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Cast or Ductile Iron Body
1. Manufacturers:
a. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
b. Grinnell Flow Control: www.grinnellvalves.com.
c. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
e. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
f.
Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com.
g. Watts Water Technologies Company: www.watts.com.
h. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable
EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral
indicating device, external tamper switch, coordinate power with fire alarm system and power
available.
2.08 CHECK VALVES
A.
B.
Up to and including 2 inches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cash Acme, Division of Reliance Worlwide Corporation: www.cashacme.com.
b. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
c. Simmons Manufacturing Company: www.simmonsmfg.com.
d. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com.
e. Watts Water Technologies Company: www.watts.com.
f.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends.
Over 2 inches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cash Acme, Division of Reliance Worlwide Corporation: www.cashacme.com.
b. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
c. Simmons Manufacturing Company: www.simmonsmfg.com.
d. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Job #14011
21 05 00 - Page 4
Copyright THA 062314
e.
f.
2.
C.
Watts Water Technologies Company: www.watts.com.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends with
automatic ball check.
4 inches and Over:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cash Acme, Division of Reliance Worlwide Corporation: www.cashacme.com.
b. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
c. Simmons Manufacturing Company: www.simmonsmfg.com.
d. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com.
e. Watts Water Technologies Company: www.watts.com.
f.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends.
2.09 DRAIN VALVES
A.
Compression Stop:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
b. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
d. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
e. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
f.
Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
g. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.
B.
Ball Valve:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
b. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
d. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
e. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
f.
Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
g. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13.
B.
Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
C.
Coordinate with ductwork, lighting, ceilings and exposed structure.
D.
Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.
G.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - Page 5
H.
Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with
recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
I.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
4. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal
piping.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports
located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
J.
Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe
level.
K.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are
welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to
welding. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
L.
Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
M. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve
fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
N.
When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and
couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
O.
Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other
non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
P.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after installation.
Q.
Provide gate or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
R.
Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 21 13 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
B.
System design, installation, and certification.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves.
C.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
B.
ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.
C.
ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements;
2012.
D.
ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
E.
ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
F.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
G.
NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2013.
H.
UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog
information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping
connections.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with
ceiling installation.
2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components
and accessories. Indicate system controls.
3. Submit shop drawings to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Design
Professional.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings.
Indicate drain and test locations.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified
requirements and code requirements.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record
drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service
depot.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA
design and installation standard.
2. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.
B.
Conform to UL, FM or Warnock Hersey requirements.
C.
Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Fire Protection Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State of Michigan.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
21 13 00 - Page 1
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
E.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years
experience approved by manufacturer.
F.
Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL, FM or Warnock Hersey label or marking.
G.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and
outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide extra sprinklers of type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA
design and installation standard.
B.
Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.
C.
Provide metal storage cabinet located adjacent to alarm valve.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment:
1. Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com.
2. Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products: www.tyco-fire.com.
3. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com.
2.02 SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A.
Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building reworking Lower Floor system for space
requirements.
B.
Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13 and Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13.
C.
Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data.
1. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals.
D.
Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve.
E.
Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
2.03 SPRINKLERS
A.
Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
1. Finish: Enamel, color white.
2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color white.
3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
B.
Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type.
1. Finish: Enamel, color as selected.
2. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
C.
Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.
1. Provide in areas subject to damage.
2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Test Connections:
1. Inspector's Test Connection for Preaction Systems:
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
21 13 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
a.
2.
Provide test connections approximately 6 ft above floor for each or portion of each sprinkler
system equipped with an alarm device, located at the most remote part of each system.
b. Route test connection to an open-site drain location, excluding janitor sinks, accepting full flow
without negative consequences.
c. Supply discharge orifice with same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice.
d. Limit vertical height of exterior wall penetration to 2 ft above finished grade.
Backflow Preventer Test Connection:
a. Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly, listed hose valves with 2.5 inch
National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain.
b. Furnish one valve for each 250 gpm of system demand or fraction thereof.
c. Provide permanent sign reading "Test Valve" in accordance with Section 22 05 53.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
B.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D.
Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
E.
Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent
upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.
F.
Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler
escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers.
G.
Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
H.
Coordinate location of inspector test outlet pipe with service sink or open site drain.
I.
Install guards on sprinklers as required.
J.
Hydrostatically test entire system.
K.
Require test be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
System Hazard Areas: Per NFPA requirements.
1. Offices: Light Hazard.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
21 13 00 - Page 3
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates.
B.
Tags.
C.
Stencils.
D.
Pipe Markers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Identification painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2007.
B.
ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
B.
Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and
valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B.
Air Terminal Units: Tags.
C.
Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
D.
Control Panels: Nameplates.
E.
Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
F.
Ductwork: Nameplates.
G.
Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
H.
Instrumentation: Tags.
I.
Major Control Components: Nameplates.
J.
Piping: Tags.
K.
Pumps: Nameplates.
L.
Relays: Tags.
M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
N.
Tanks: Nameplates.
O.
Thermostats: Nameplates.
P.
Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
Q.
Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A.
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 - Page 1
2.03 TAGS
A.
Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B.
Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
C.
Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.04 STENCILS
A.
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters.
2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters.
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters.
4. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.
B.
Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A.
Comply with ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.
C.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
D.
Color code as follows:
1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.
2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.
3. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.
4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters.
5. Combustible Fluids: Brown with white letters.
6. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient
adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B.
Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C.
Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
D.
Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to
each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
H.
Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and
at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping insulation.
B.
Jackets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jacket.
C.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
D.
Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
B.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
C.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.
D.
ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.
E.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007.
F.
ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing
Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
G.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
H.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2013.
I.
ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2013.
J.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
K.
ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2013.
L.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2013.
M. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal
Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
N.
ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation; 2012a.
O.
ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
P.
ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel; 2008.
Q.
ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007.
R.
ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2012.
S.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
T.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
U.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National
Fire Protection Association; 2006.
V.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - Page 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with
minimum five years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
5. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor
transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches.
D.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
E.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
F.
Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
G.
Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
3. Weave: 5x5.
H.
Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.
2.09 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A.
Manufacturer:
1. Aeroflex USA, Inc: www.aeroflexusa.com.
2. Armacell LLC: www.armacell.us.
3. K-Flex USA LLC: www.kflexusa.com.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
B.
Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M
Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.
3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
C.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.10 JACKETS
A.
PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 10 mil.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
3. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
a. Compatible with insulation.
B.
ABS Plastic:
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature of 180 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.012 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 30 mil.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D.
Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
E.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal
laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples
and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but
bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G.
For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
H.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - Page 3
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
I.
Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.
J.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports,
protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.
3.03 SCHEDULES
Piping System Type
Domestic Water
Domestic Hot Water
Storm Drainage
Refrigerant
Fluid Temp
Range
40-70 F
Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes (inches)
To 1"
.5
.75
1-1/4"-2"
.75
1.0
1.0
2-1/2"-4"
1.0
1.0
1.0
A.
Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation: See schedule on Drawings.
2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: See schedule on Drawings.
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
3. Domestic Cold Water:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation
4. Chilled Drinking Water Supply:
5. Chilled Drinking Water Recirculation:
B.
Cooling Systems:
1. Refrigerant Suction: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation.
5"-6"
1.0
1.0
1.0
8" & up
1.0
1.5
1.0
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 22 10 05
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
3. Natural Gas.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
C.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D.
Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
E.
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.
F.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot
Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004).
B.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
C.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
D.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
E.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).
F.
ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1968.
G.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
H.
ASSE 1003 - Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems; The American
Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2009.
I.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless; 2012.
J.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products; 2013.
K.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service; 2013.
L.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
M. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
N.
ASTM B68/B68M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed; 2011.
O.
ASTM B75/B75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2011.
P.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
Q.
ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2013.
R.
ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled
Inside Diameter; 2012.
S.
ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on
Outside Diameter; 2003.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 1
T.
ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40;
2013.
U.
ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems; 2012.
V.
ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe; 2002
(Reapproved 2009).
W. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe
and Fittings; 2012.
X.
ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2010.
Y.
ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2011.
Z.
ASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2005.
AA. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
AB. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2008.
AC. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2010.
AD. ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2013a.
AE. ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems; 2011.
AF. ASTM F1281 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Crosslinked Polyethylene
(PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe; 2011.
AG. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water
Works Association; 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
AH. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association;
2009 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
AI. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651).
AJ. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2011
AK. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.
AL. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements;
2012.
AM. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
AN. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
AO. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
AP. MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
AQ. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2013.
AR. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
AS. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.
AT. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
AU. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.
AV. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
AW. PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS), Strength
Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings For
Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe; Plastics Pipe Institute; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers
catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B.
Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project,
with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations.
C.
Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
D.
Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water
certification, water pressure rating.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets.
B.
Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2.03 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
B.
Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze.
2. Joints: Flared.
C.
Polyethylene/Aluminum Composite Pipe: ASTM F1281 or ASTM F1282, tested for potable water and
residual chlorine use.
1. Fittings and Joints: Brass compression type.
2.04 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Fittings: Cast iron, coated.
3. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
4. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 3
5.
Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified,
utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Grinnell Mechanical Products, a Tyco International Company: www.grinnell.com.
2) Viega LLC: www.viega.com.
2.05 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.
2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.
2.06 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A.
Unions for Pipe Sizes two (2) inch and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B.
Flanges for Pipe Size Over two (2) inch:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene
gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
C.
Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with
continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Housing Material: Malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized.
3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees
F.
4. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber suitable for operating temperature range from -20 degrees F to 180
degrees F.
5. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
6. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Mechanical Products, a Tyco International Company: www.grinnell.com.
D.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
2.07 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using
MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.
3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.
6. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing
membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing
assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a. Bases: High density polypropylene.
b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.
c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for
equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.
f.
Manufacturers:
1) PHP Systems/Design; PHP Pipe Supports: www.phpsd.com.
B.
Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
C.
Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll, double
hanger.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
7. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp
with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.
8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
11. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
D.
Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.
E.
Shields
1. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over insulation in
180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
2. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering
protective saddles.
3. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles
in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
2.08 GATE VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
2. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
3. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
5. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
6. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
7. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
8. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Up To and Including two (2) inches:
1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge
disc, solder ends.
C.
2 Inches and Larger:
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 5
1.
MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc,
flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet
above floor.
2.09 BALL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
2. Crane Company:Nibco, Inc: www.cranevalve.com.
3. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
5. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
6. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
7. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
8. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Construction, two (2) inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated
brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing
stops, solder ends with union.
C.
Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle,
flanged or grooved ends.
2.10 GAS COCKS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Crane CompanyNibco, Inc: www.cranevalve.com.www.nibco.com.
2. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
3. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
4. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
5. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug (non-lubricated), teflon packing, threaded ends.
C.
Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends.
D.
Gas valves must meet AGA approval standards.
E.
Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure
lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw.
F.
Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, 300 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure
lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw.
2.11 FLOW CONTROLS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.
2. Griswold Controls: www.griswoldcontrols.com.
3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.
4. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
5. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
6. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.mullerwaterproducts.com.
7. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure
test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.
C.
Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times
minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi psi.
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.12 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATINGS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for 125 minimum psig working pressure and 450 degrees
F.
B.
Valves for fire protection suitable for 175 psig working pressure.
2.13 VALVE OPERATORS
A.
Provide suitable handwheels for gate, globe or angle, radiation and drain valves, and inside hose bibbs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
D.
Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Install ball valves for shut-off and isolating service. Install valves on all equipment, major branch lines, and
as shown on drawings.
G.
Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, and low points of piping and apparatus. Include drain valves
and piping to a point of drainage for all hydronic coils. Hose thread fittings shall be acceptable for a drain
connection, if piping is not indicated on drawings.
H.
Install gate valves for throttling steam systems in sizes 8 inches and larger.
I.
Use plug cocks for gas service.
J.
Use ball valves or code approved balancing valves in water systems for throttling service.
K.
Use butterfly valves for hydronic service interchangeably with gate and globe valves.
L.
Use butterfly valves in fire protection systems where approved.
M. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
N.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19.
O.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
P.
Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly; refer to Section 07 54 00.
Q.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one
coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
R.
Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to
Section 09 90 00.
S.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
T.
Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
U.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
V.
Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 7
3.
4.
5.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with
recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
W. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal
piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports
located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to Section 22 05
48.
11. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
3.04 APPLICATION
A.
Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C.
Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
D.
Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E.
Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F.
Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
G.
Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A.
Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to
drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.
B.
Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C.
Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid
(hydrochloric).
D.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80
mg/L residual.
E.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of
outlets.
F.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
I.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and
analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 8
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide new connection to existing sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert
elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
3.08 SCHEDULES
A.
Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch.
d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch.
e. Pipe size: 8 inches to 12 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 14 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 7/8 inch.
f.
Pipe size: 14 inches and Over:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 20 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 1 inch.
2. Plastic Piping:
a. All Sizes:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 9
SECTION 22 10 06
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cleanouts.
B.
Backflow preventers.
C.
Water hammer arrestors.
D.
Thermostatic mixing valves.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B.
Section 07 50 01 – Roof Restoration.
C.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.
D.
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.
E.
Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2007).
B.
ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004
(ANSI/ASSE 1011).
C.
ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society of Sanitary
Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012).
D.
ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection
Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011.
E.
ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American
Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).
F.
ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections; 2013.
G.
ASTM C478M - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections [Metric]; 2013.
H.
PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: Two.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with not less than three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANOUTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2. Josam Company: www.josam.com.
3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
D.
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas:
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - Page 1
1.
E.
Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and
round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor
finish in finished floor areas.
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless
steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.02 HOSE BIBBS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2. Prier Products, Inc: www.prier.com.
3. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
B.
Interior Hose Bibbs:
1. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout,
chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE
1011.
C.
Interior Mixing Type Hose Bibbs:
1. Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, integral stops, chrome
plated where exposed with handwheels, and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011.
2.03 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVES
A.
Box Manufacturers:
1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
2. Oatey; Model:: www.oatey.com.
B.
Valve Manufacturers:
1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
C.
Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles, socket for 2
inch waste, slip in finishing cover.
2.04 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX
A.
Box Manufacturers:
1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
2. Oatey: www.oatey.com.
B.
Valve Manufacturers:
1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
C.
Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip in finishing cover.
2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
B.
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently
operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located
between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure;
non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
B.
Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Copper construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for
operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C.
Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D.
Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E.
Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic
water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation,
irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.
F.
Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
G.
Provide trap seal primer at all new floor drains, ASSE 1018 or ASSE 1044. Install trap primer at each floor
drain (No distribution unit).
H.
Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply
piping to lavatories sinks and other fixtures as needed.
I.
Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each
washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - Page 3
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water closets.
B.
Lavatories.
C.
Sinks.
D.
Service sinks.
E.
Electric water coolers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Preparation of vanities for lavatories.
B.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Preparation of counters for sinks.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.
D.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.
E.
Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z124.1.2 - American National Standard for Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units; 2005.
B.
ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically-Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers; Air-Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute; 2002.
C.
ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).
D.
ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
E.
ASME A112.19.1 - Enamelled Cast Iron and Enamelled Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 2013
F.
ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
G.
ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (R2013).
H.
ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004).
I.
ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011.
J.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
K.
ISFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators
Association; 2001 (2007)
L.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and
finishes.
B.
Samples: Submit two sets of color chips for each standard color.
C.
Waterless Urinals: Submit recommended frequency of maintenance and parts replacement, methods of
cleaning, sources of replacement supplies and parts.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and
registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 1
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to
protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS (WC)
A.
Tank Type Water Closet Manufacturers:
1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.
2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.
3. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC: www.mansfieldplumbing.com.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
B.
Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 16.5 inches high, close-coupled closet
combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve,
bolt caps.
1. Water Consumption: Maximum 1.6 gallon per flush.
C.
Seat Manufacturers:
1. Bemis Manufacturing Company: www.bemismfg.com.
2. Centoco; Model 600.
3. Church Seat Company: www.churchseats.com.
4. Olsonite: www.olsonite.com.
5. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
D.
Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, less cover, complete with self-sustaining hinge.
2.02 LAVATORIES (L-1)
A.
Lavatory Manufacturers:
1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.
2. Eljer: www.eljer.com.
3. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.
4. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC: www.mansfieldplumbing.com.
5. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
B.
Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin:
1. ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory 20 x 18 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back,
rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression.
a. Drilling Centers: 4 inch.
C.
Supply Faucet Manufacturers:
1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.
2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.
3. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
D.
Supply Faucet:
1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator with
maximum 2.0 gpm flow, single lever handle.
2. Mixing Valve: Internal, automatic.
3. Water Supply: 3/8 inch compression connections.
4. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 GPM, laminar flow device.
5. Provide ASSE 1070 mixing valve.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
E.
Accessories:
1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.
2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer.
3. Loose key stops.
4. Flexible supplies.
5. Carrier:
a. Manufacturers:
1) JOSAM Company: www.josam.com.
2) Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries: www.jrsmith.com.
3) Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com.
4) Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
b. ASME A112.6.1M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment,
concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.
2.03 LAVATORIES (L-2)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com.
2. Eljer: www.eljer.com.
3. Kohler Company: www.kohlerco.com.
4. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC: www.mansfieldplumbing.com.
5. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
B.
Vitreous China Counter Top Basin:
1. ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china self-rimming counter top lavatory with drillings on 4 inch centers,
front overflow, soap depression, seal of putty, caulking, or concealed vinyl gasket.
C.
Supply Faucet Manufacturers:
1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.
2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.
3. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
D.
Supply Faucet:
1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator with
maximum 2.0 gpm flow, single lever handle.
2. Mixing Valve: Internal, automatic.
3. Water Supply: 3/8 inch compression connections.
4. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 GPM, laminar flow device.
5. Provide ASSE 1070 mixing valve.
E.
Accessories:
1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.
2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer.
3. Wheel handle stops.
4. Loose key stops.
5. Flexible supplies.
2.04 SINK (S-1)
A.
Sink Manufacturers:
1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.
2. Eljer: www.eljer.com.
3. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com.
4. Just Manufacturing: www.justmfg.com.
5. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.
B.
Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 20 gage thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and
undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim.
1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece.
C.
Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, vandal proof water economy aerator
with maximum 0.5 gpm flow, single lever handle.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 3
1.
D.
Equivalent to Model "RELIANT" 4205.100 manufactured by American Standard or equal by American
StandardDelta, Kohler or Eljer.
Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon, wheel
handle stop, flexible supplies.
2.05 SINK (S-2)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Eljer: www.eljer.com.
2. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com.
3. Just Manufacturing: www.justmfg.com.
B.
Double Compartment Bowl:
1. ASME A112.19.3; Each bowl to have 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self rimming and
undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim.
a. Drain: 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece.
C.
Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with high rise swing spout, vandal proof water
economy aerator with maximum 2.2 gpm flow, single lever handle.
1. Equivalent to Model "RELIANT" 4205.100 manufactured by American Standard or equal by American
StandardDelta, Kohler or Eljer.
D.
Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon, wheel
handle stop, flexible supplies.
2.06 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Tri Palm International/Oasis: www.tripalmint.com.
2. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com.
3. Haws Corporation: www.hawsco.com.
B.
Fountain:
1. ARI 1010; surface handicapped mounted electric water cooler with stainless steel top, stainless steel
body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, push button,
mounting bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser.
a. Capacity: 8.0 gpm of 50 degree F water with inlet at 80 degree F and room temperature of 90
degree F.
2. Carrier:
a. Manufacturers:
1) JOSAM Company: www.josam.com.
2) Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries: www.jrsmith.com.
3) Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com.
4) Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
b. ASME A112.6.1M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment,
concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.
2.07 SERVICE SINKS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com.
2. Florestone, Inc: www.florestone.com.
3. Kohler Company: www.kohlerco.com.
4. Zurn Industries: www.zurn.com.
B.
Bowl:
1. 24 x 24 x 10 inch high Tan molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide shoulders, stainless steel
strainer.
C.
Trim:
1. ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with lever handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker,
hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps
and adjustable threaded wall flanges. Manufactured by Delta, Speakman or Florestone.
D.
Accessories:
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1.
2.
3.
5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose.
Hose clamp hanger.
Wall guard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B.
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
C.
Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories
and sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in
schedule for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
C.
Install components level and plumb.
D.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
E.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05, color to match fixture.
F.
Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and
installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
B.
Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.
C.
Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.08 SCHEDULES
A.
Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated.
1. Water Closet:
a. Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
b. Accessible: 18 inches to top of seat.
2. Lavatory:
a. Standard: 31 inches to top of basin rim.
b. Accessible: 34 inches to top of basin rim.
c. RE: Drawings for additional height requirements.
3. Electric Water Cooler:
a. Child: 30 inches to top of basin rim.
b. Standard Adult: 40 inches to top of basin rim.
c. Accessible: 36 inches to top of spout.
B.
Fixture Rough-In
1. Water Closet (Tank Type):
a. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch.
b. Waste: 4 Inch.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 5
2.
3.
4.
5.
c. Vent: 2 Inch.
Lavatory:
a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch.
b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 Inch.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch.
Sink:
a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch.
b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 Inch.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch.
Service Sink:
a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch.
b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch.
c. Waste: 3 Inch.
d. Vent: 1-1/2 Inch.
Electric Water Cooler:
a. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch.
b. Waste: 1-1/4 Inch.
c. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 22 60 05
MEDICAL AIR, GAS, AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Medical oxygen gas system.
B.
Medical compressed air system.
C.
Medical vacuum system.
D.
Nitrous oxide system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C.
Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2012.
B.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
C.
ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2013.
D.
ASME (BPV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.
E.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service; 2013.
F.
ASTM A403/A403M - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings; 2013.
G.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
H.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
I.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
J.
ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.
K.
ASTM B819 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems; 2000
(Reapproved 2011).
L.
ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and
120; 2012.
M. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40;
2013.
N.
ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems; 2012.
O.
AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding
Society; 2011 and errata.
P.
CGA G-7 - Compressed Air for Human Respiration; Compressed Gas Association; 2008.
Q.
CGA V-5 - Diameter-Index Safety System (Noninterchangeable Low Pressure Connections for Medical
Gas Applications); Compressed Gas Association; 2008.
R.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and
Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
S.
MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2013.
T.
MSS SP-88 - Diaphragm Type Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.; 2010.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
MEDICAL AIR, GAS, AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
22 60 05 - Page 1
U.
MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.
V.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2008.
W. NFPA 55 - Standard for the Storage, Use, and Handling of Compressed Gases and Cryogenic Fluids in
Portable and Stationary Containers, Cylinders, and Tanks; National Fire Protection Association; 2013.
X.
NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature and illustrations for all components indicating size,
dimensions and configuration.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate general assembly of components, mounting and installation details, and general
layout of control and alarm panels. Submit detailed medical wall assembly drawings.
C.
Samples: Submit two of each outlet.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 99 – Level C.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years of experience.
D.
Testing Laboratory: Company specializing in performing testing of the type specified in this section, with
minimum five years of documented experience.
E.
Conform to applicable code for medical gas systems.
F.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction, indicating approval of systems.
G.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept material on site in factory containers and packing. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect from damage and contamination by maintaining factory packaging and caps in place until
installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all systems piping and fittings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Factory Preparation: Wash inside of copper pipe and copper fitting with hot solution of sodium carbonate or
trisodium phosphate mixed 1 lb to 3 gal of water; rinse with water, and blow dry with oil-free dry nitrogen or
compressed air.
F.
Oral Evacuation Systems:
1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, PVC 1120 or 1220, Schedule 40.
2. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC long radius or wye type.
3. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D2564 cement.
2.02 VALVES
A.
Factory Preparation for Oxygen Service: Disassemble, clean, degrease, seal, and pack for shipping.
B.
Ball Valves:
1. Requirements: Comply with MSS SP-110; bronze body, three piece, double-seal ball valves with
replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and stem seals, for minimum 600 psi cold working pressure,
flange or union mounting, labeled for intended service.
MEDICAL AIR, GAS, AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
22 60 05 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
F.
Ball Valves (Oral Evacuation Systems Only):
1. PVC body, double-seal ball valves with replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and stem seals, for
minimum 100 psi working pressure, designed especially for vacuum service.
2.03 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A.
See equipment sheets for piping accessories requirements.
B.
Piping Identification: Pressure sensitive adhesive tape and decals, color and labeling to conform with
Section 22 05 53.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with NFPA 99.
B.
Pre-Installation Cleaning: Disassemble positive pressure gas systems pipe, fittings, valves, and
components, except those supplied cleaned and prepared for intended service, and thoroughly wash in hot
solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate mixed 1 lb to 3 gal of water. After washing, rinse with
water, dry and cap until installation.
C.
Braze joints in pipe and tubing. Avoid leaving excess flux inside of pipe and fittings. During brazing of pipe
connections, purge interior of pipe continuously with nitrogen.
D.
Effect changes in size with reducing fittings. Make changes in direction of required turns or offsets with
fittings or tubing shaped by bending tools. Make bends free of flattening, buckling or thinning of tube wall.
E.
Cut pipe and tubing accurately and install without springing or forcing.
F.
Install exposed oxygen piping in wall-mounted sheet steel raceways and junction boxes.
G.
Encase buried oxygen piping in cast-iron pipe. Provide with FM listed heat trace with fixed temperature
regulation, set for 80 degrees F maximum, and terminating at junction box, mounted near main oxygen
supply shut-off valve. Insulate buried oxygen lines and heat trace with insulation as specified in Section 22
07 19.
H.
Grade piping down in direction of flow.
I.
Provide pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Finish flush
at both ends. Extend 2 inches above finished floors. Pack space between pipe or tubing and sleeve, and
calk.
J.
Identify piping with tape and decals. Provide piping identification code and schematic for installation under
provisions of Section 22 05 53. Install labeling on pipe at intervals of not more than 20 feet and at least
once in each room and each story traversed by pipeline.
K.
Excavate and backfill pipe trenches as specified in Section 31 23 16 and Section 31 23 23. Coordinate
provision of utility warning and identification tape with backfill operation. Provide above all buried lines at a
depth of 8 to 12 inches below finish grade.
L.
Support gas piping with pipe hooks or hangers suitable for size of pipe, spaced:
1. 1/2 inch pipe or tubing: 72 inches.
2. 3/4 inch or one inch pipe or tubing: 96 inches.
3. 1-1/4 inches or larger (horizontal): 120 inches.
4. 1-1/4 inches or larger (vertical): Every floor level.
M. Install underground piping in trenches minimum 42 inches deep adequately protected against physical
damage and corrosion or in ducts and tunnels that are not occupied by fuel oil lines and are vented.
N.
Except where indicated or in flush wall mounted cabinets, install manual shut off valves with stem vertical
and accessible for operation and maintenance.
O.
Install strainers on inlet side of pressure reducing valves. Provide main gas valves (pressure reducing or
flow control) with by-passes and isolation valves to permit maintenance without interruption of gas.
3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND PRESSURE TESTING
A.
After erection of pipe and tubing but prior to installation of service outlet valves, blow systems clear of free
moisture and foreign matter with nitrogen gas.
B.
Install service outlet valves, subject system to test pressure of 150 psi with nitrogen or dry compressed air.
Check with soapy water. Provide 24-hour standing pressure test.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
MEDICAL AIR, GAS, AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
22 60 05 - Page 3
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent testing agency to certify system is complete, zone valves installed, alarm systems functional,
and tests performed. Document tests and submit.
B.
Reduce pressure in piping systems other than system under investigation to atmospheric.
C.
Test system with dry compressed air or dry nitrogen with test pressure in piping system at 50 psi.
D.
Check each station outlet of every piping system to determine test gas is dispensed only from outlet of
system under investigation. Measure pressure with gage attached to specific adaptor. Do not use universal
adaptors.
E.
Disconnect test gas and connect proper gas to each system. Purge entire system to remove test gas.
Check with analyzer suitable for gas installed.
END OF SECTION
MEDICAL AIR, GAS, AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
22 60 05 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002.
B.
ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988.
C.
NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National
Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.
D.
SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed
and the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Submit to Design Professional.
2. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be
performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.
b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested,
adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration
date.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including:
1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).
2) Diffuser proportioning.
3) Branch/submain proportioning.
4) Total flow calculations.
5) Rechecking.
6) Diversity issues.
f.
Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:
1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all
terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations.
2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.
g. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest
possible pressures and methods to verify this.
h. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions.
i.
Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what
level (total building, zone, etc.).
j.
Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity.
k. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods.
l.
Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified.
m. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.).
n. Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any.
o. Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified.
p. False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified.
q. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure
differentials.
r. Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if specified.
Job #14011
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Copyright THA 062314
23 05 93 - Page 1
s.
t.
u.
Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others,
contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency).
Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency.
Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.
B.
Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and
parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect the control
system setup and operation.
C.
Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for
Design Professional and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
3. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and
indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air
outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
4. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.
5. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that;
otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
6. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.
7. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f.
Project Design Professional.
g. Project Engineer.
h. Project Contractor.
i.
Project altitude.
j.
Report date.
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and
rough setting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.
4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
5. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.
B.
Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to
Substantial Completion of the project.
C.
Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke
detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the
authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.
2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.
3. Certified by one of the following:
a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC
National Performance Guaranty.
b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Job #14011
23 05 93 - Page 2
Copyright THA 062314
c.
TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute:
www.tabbcertified.org.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B.
Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent
system balance.
C.
Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available
to Design Professional to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B.
Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or
minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust
outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
C.
Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:
1. Running log of events and issues.
2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.
3. Contract interpretation requests.
4. Lists of completed tests.
B.
Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
C.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D.
Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross
reference the location in the final report.
E.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has
been rectified.
F.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as
selected and witnessed by the Owner.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - Page 3
3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air
quantities at site altitude.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers
and splitters.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch
air quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total
pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K.
Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance
variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.
L.
Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required
relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm
connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature
control.
3.07 SCOPE
A.
Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1. Forced Air Furnaces
2. Unit Air Conditioners
3. Air Coils
4. Fans
5. Air Filters
6. Outside air
7. Exhaust fans.
8. Air Inlets and Outlets
3.08 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
A.
Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer
2. Model/Frame
3. HP/BHP
4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
5. RPM
6. Service factor
7. Starter size, rating, heater elements
8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
B.
Air Cooled Condensers:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Manufacturer
4. Model number
5. Serial number
6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
8.
Number of compressors
C.
Cooling Coils:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
10. Air pressure drop, design and actual
D.
Air Moving Equipment:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
6. Air flow, specified and actual
7. Return air flow, specified and actual
8. Outside air flow, specified and actual
9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
10. Inlet pressure
11. Discharge pressure
12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
13. Number of Belts/Make/Size
14. Fan RPM
E.
Return Air/Outside Air:
1. Identification/location
2. Design air flow
3. Actual air flow
4. Design return air flow
5. Actual return air flow
6. Design outside air flow
7. Actual outside air flow
8. Return air temperature
9. Outside air temperature
10. Required mixed air temperature
11. Actual mixed air temperature
12. Design outside/return air ratio
13. Actual outside/return air ratio
F.
Exhaust Fans:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Air flow, specified and actual
6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7. Inlet pressure
8. Discharge pressure
9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
10. Number of Belts/Make/Size
11. Fan RPM
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - Page 5
G.
Duct Traverses:
1. System zone/branch
2. Duct size
3. Area
4. Design velocity
5. Design air flow
6. Test velocity
7. Test air flow
8. Duct static pressure
9. Air temperature
10. Air correction factor
H.
Air Distribution Tests:
1. Air terminal number
2. Room number/location
3. Terminal type
4. Terminal size
5. Area factor
6. Design velocity
7. Design air flow
8. Test (final) velocity
9. Test (final) air flow
10. Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 23 07 13
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
New Duct insulation.
B.
Existing Duct Insulation and Jacket.
C.
Insulation jackets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jackets.
B.
Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
B.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007.
C.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.
D.
ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
Applications; 2002.
E.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2004.
F.
ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound
Absorbing Material); 2005.
G.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008.
H.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
I.
ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 1996
(Reapproved 2002).
J.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National
Fire Protection Association; 2006.
K.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
L.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship
and that installation standards will be achieved.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this
section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section,
with minimum five years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including
product density and thickness.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by
storing in original wrapping.
Job #14011
DUCT INSULATION
Copyright THA 062314
23 07 13 - Page 1
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B.
Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A.
Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D.
Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive
rubber based adhesive.
2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A.
Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.
4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.
2.04 JACKETS
A.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a. Compatible with insulation.
B.
Exterior Duct Field-Applied Jacket:
1. Laminated Self-Adhesive Water and Weather Seals: Permanent acrylic self-adhesive system.
a. Product: "MODEL 1577CW-W" by GTA-NHT, Inc: www.venturetape.com.
b. Color: White.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.00 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.
d. Thickness: 6 mils.
e. Adhesive Peel Strength: 55 oz/in.
f.
Tensile Strength: 68 lb/in width.
g. Puncture Strength: 35.4 lb.
h. Tear Strength: 8.5 lb.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.05 DUCT LINER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
B.
Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and
preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer or
acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21.
1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.
3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum.
4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30.
b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45.
c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60.
d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70.
C.
Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type.
D.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C.
Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and
expansion joints.
D.
Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
E.
Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with duct board and FSK jacket..
F.
External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or
tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to
prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without
disturbing wrapping.
G.
Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - Page 3
5.
Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow
for insulation thickness.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Concealed Supply Air Ducts: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation.
1. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
B.
Return Ducts: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation Liner.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
C.
Outside Air Intake Ducts: Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation.
1. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
D.
Vacuum pump discharge Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation
1. Thickness: 1 1/2”
END OF SECTION
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping.
B.
Refrigerant.
C.
Moisture and liquid indicators.
D.
Valves.
E.
Strainers.
F.
Check valves.
G.
Pressure relief valves.
H.
Filter-driers.
I.
Solenoid valves.
J.
Expansion valves.
K.
Receivers.
L.
Flexible connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
C.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2005.
B.
ARI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Dryers; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.
C.
ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter Driers; Air-Conditioning
and Refrigeration Institute; 2005.
D.
ARI 750 - Standard for Performance Rating of Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves;
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.
E.
ARI 760 - Standard for Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants;
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.
F.
ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.
G.
ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.
H.
ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
I.
ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
J.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).
K.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2006.
L.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2006.
M. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 1
N.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless; 2007.
O.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007.
P.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.
Q.
ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.
R.
ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Field Service; 2003.
S.
ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved
2008).
T.
AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding
Society; 2004 and errata.
U.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2008.
V.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2002.
W. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
X.
MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
Y.
UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1999.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure
flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
B.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.
C.
Liquid Indicators:
1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.
2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.
3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
D.
Valves:
1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.
2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.
3. Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.
4. Use check valves on compressor discharge.
5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.
E.
Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and
expansion valve.
F.
Strainers:
1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.
2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid line strainer.
3. On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line.
4. Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.
G.
Filter-Driers:
1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic expansion valves,
solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.
2. Use a filter-drier on suction line just ahead of compressor.
3. Use sealed filter-driers in lines smaller than 1/2 inch outside diameter.
4. Use sealed filter-driers in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.
5. Use replaceable core filter-driers in lines of 1/2 inch outside diameter or greater.
6. Use replaceable core liquid-line filter-driers in systems utilizing receivers.
7. Use filter-driers for each solenoid valve.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
H.
Solenoid Valves:
1. Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control.
2. Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.
3. Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line
when system shuts down.
I.
Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information.
Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.
C.
Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple
pipe, and riser support hangers.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with
minimum five years of documented experience.
B.
Design piping system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this
type of work and licensed in the State of Michigan.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.
B.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations.
C.
Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
D.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the purpose
indicated.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B.
Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place
until installation.
C.
Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected
into system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.
B.
Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.
2. Joints: Flared.
C.
Pipe Supports and Anchors:
1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type
using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Conform to ASME B31.5.
3. Conform to ASME B31.5.
4. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.
5. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
9. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 3
10. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.
11. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
12. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
13. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with
lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit
threaded hanger rods.
14. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing
membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing
assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a. Bases: High density polypropylene.
b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.
c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for
equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.
2.02 REFRIGERANT
A.
Refrigerant: R-410A, Non-chlorine as defined in ASHRAE Std 34.
2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.
2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com.
3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.
B.
Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color
coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum
temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi.
2.04 VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com.
2. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.
3. Danfoss Flomatic: www.flomatic.com.
B.
Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel
diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends,
with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of
275 degrees F.
C.
Packed Angle Valves:
1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and
seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of
500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.
D.
Ball Valves:
1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet
and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure
of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.
E.
Service Valves:
1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve,
flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi.
2.05 STRAINERS
A.
Straight Line or Angle Line Type:
1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel
wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi.
B. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type:
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1.
Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen, for maximum working pressure of 430
psi.
2.06 CHECK VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com.
2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com.
3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.
B.
Globe Type:
1. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder,
phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum temperature of 300 degrees
F and maximum working pressure of 425 psi.
C.
Straight Through Type:
1. Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working
pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F.
2.07 FILTER-DRIERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric: www.emersonflowcontrols.com.
2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com.
3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.
B.
Performance:
1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: 5 ton, minimum, rated in accordance with ARI 710.
2. Flow Capacity - Suction Line: 5 ton, minimum, rated in accordance with ARI 730.
3. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator capacity.
4. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi, minimum.
C.
Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activated alumina,
activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns; of construction that
will not pass into refrigerant lines.
D.
Construction: UL listed.
1. Replaceable Core Type: Steel shell with removable cap.
2. Sealed Type: Copper shell.
3. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.
2.08 EXPANSION VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric: www.emersonflowcontrols.com.
2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com.
3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.
B.
Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external
equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non-replaceable
capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.
C.
Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across
valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat.
Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load.
2.09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Circuit Hydraulics, Ltd: www.circuit-hydraulics.co.uk.
2. Flexicraft Industries: www.flexicraft.com.
3. Penflex: www.penflex.com.
B.
Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long
with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
C.
Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.
D.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction
of oil return.
E.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
F.
Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with
recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
G.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal
piping.
6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
H.
Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as
required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
I.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
J.
Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section
08 31 00.
K.
Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
L.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of
zinc rich primer to welding.
M. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90
00.
N.
Insulate piping; refer to Section.
O.
Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section.
P.
Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.
Q.
Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
R.
Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.
S.
Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.
T.
Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
U.
Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
V.
Provide intermediate trap in vertical risers that exceed 25 feet.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
B.
Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psi
using halide torch. Test to no leakage.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A.
Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.
1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. 1-3/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. 1-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. 2-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. 2-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. 3-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
8. 3-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
9. 4-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
B.
Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.
1. 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. 1-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. 2 inches: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. 2-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. 4 inches: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - Page 7
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal ductwork.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005.
B.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
C.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
D.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
Bake Hardenable; 2007a.
E.
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength;
2008.
F.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
G.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007.
H.
ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe; 2007.
I.
ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe
[Metric]; 2007.
J.
ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets;
2005a.
K.
ASTM C 443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using
Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2007.
L.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2002.
M. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2006.
N.
NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations;
National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
O.
SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; 1985, First Edition.
P.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
Q.
SMACNA (FGD) - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
R.
UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2005.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, and duct connections.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to
start of work for low pressure class and higher systems.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 31 00 - Page 1
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with
minimum 5 years of documented experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and NFPA 96 standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with
G60/Z180 coating.
B.
Un-Galvanized Steel for Ducts: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold-rolled commercial steel.
C.
Stainless Steel for Ducts: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
D.
Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible
with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
E.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously
threaded.
F.
Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
B.
Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide
blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior
side; seal to louver frame and duct.
C.
Low Pressure Supply (Heating & Cooling Systems): 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
D.
General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
C.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
END OF SECTION
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 31 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Air turning devices/extractors.
B.
Backdraft dampers - metal.
C.
Duct access doors.
D.
Duct test holes.
E.
Fire dampers.
F.
Flexible duct connections.
G.
Smoke dampers.
H.
Volume control dampers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2012.
B.
NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2012.
C.
NFPA 96 - Standard Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2011.
D.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
E.
UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
F.
UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
G.
UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A.
Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable
blades, mounting straps.
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A.
Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air
moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - Page 1
B.
Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center pivoted
blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free
manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit
setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES
A.
Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded
plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
2.05 FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.
B.
Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber
on top side and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.
C.
Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat
retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket.
D.
Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs
and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure
class ducts up to 12 inches in height.
E.
Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless
steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel
closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
F.
Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing
dampers.
2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
B.
Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum
density 30 oz per sq yd.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.
2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
C.
Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz
range.
D.
Maximum Installed Length: 14 inch.
2.07 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
B.
Splitter Dampers:
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes
over 24 inches.
2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge
or rod.
3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with
set screw.
C.
Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
1. Blade: 24 gage, minimum.
D.
Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble
center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.
1. Blade: 18 gage, minimum.
E.
End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade
dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronze bearings.
F.
Quadrants:
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1.
2.
3.
Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A.
Internal Strut End Plugs: Combination end-mounting and sealing plugs for metal conduit used as internal
reinforcement struts for metal ducts; plug crimped inside conduit with outside gasketed washer seal.
B.
Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris out of ducts during
construction.
1. Thickness: 2 mils.
2. High tack water based adhesive.
3. UV stable light blue color.
4. Elongation Before Break: 325 percent, minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.
B.
Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
C.
Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for
cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand
access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review
locations prior to fabrication.
D.
Provide duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
E.
Provide fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and
outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install
with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant
springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
F.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
G.
Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
H.
At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment.
I.
At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to
the equipment; see Section 22 05 48.
J.
For fans developing static pressures of 5.0 inches and over, cover flexible connections with leaded vinyl
sheet, held in place with metal straps.
K.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken
from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.
L.
Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
M. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. Refer to Section 23 36 00 - Air
Terminal Units.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - Page 3
SECTION 23 34 23
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Ceiling exhaust fans.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.
B.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2010.
B.
AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2005.
C.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
D.
AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.
E.
AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc.; 2008.
F.
AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
G.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.
H.
NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations;
National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
I.
UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point
clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Permanent ventilators may not be used for ventilation during construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Carnes Company, Inc: www.carnes.com.
B.
Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.
C.
Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.
2.02 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS
A.
Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic insulation,
resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
B.
Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor.
C.
Grille: Molded white plastic.
D.
Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable
pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with
self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 23 - Page 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.
3.02 SCHEDULES - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 23 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Diffusers.
B.
Registers/grilles.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.
B.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc.; 2012.
B.
ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (R2011).
C.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size,
finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size,
location, application, and noise level.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of experience.
B.
Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
C.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Titus.:www.titus-hvac.com
B.
Price: www.price.com.
C.
Tuttle and bailey: www.tulle&bailey.com
D.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be considered if
the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Type: Provide square and rectangular, adjustable pattern diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern.
B.
Connections: As scheduled on drawings.
C.
Frame: Provide surface mount and inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and
ceiling frame.
D.
Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
E.
Color: As shown on drawings.
2.03 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.
Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, two-way
deflection.
B.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C.
Construction: Made of aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish.
D.
Color: As shown on drawings.
E.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 37 00 - Page 1
2.04 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.
Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45
degrees, vertical face.
B.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
C.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
D.
Color: As shown on the drawings.
E.
Color: To be selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range.
F.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face
where not individually connected to exhaust fans.
G.
Gymnasiums: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile.
2.05 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A.
Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch grid core.
B.
Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish.
C.
Color: As shown on the drawings
D.
Color: To be selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range.
E.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
F.
Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.02 SCHEDULES - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 37 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 23 81 27
SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Forced air furnaces.
B.
Air cooled condensing units.
C.
Controls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Mounting pad for outdoor unit.
B.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Indoor coil condensate drain.
C.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
B.
AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute; 2008.
C.
AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air-Conditioning, Heating,
and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.
D.
AHRI 610 - Performance Rating of Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications; Air
Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.
E.
ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2013 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15).
F.
ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and
Condensing Units that Operate at Subcritical Temperatures of the Refrigerant; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010.
G.
ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by
Particle Size; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2012.
H.
ASHRAE Std 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in
General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.[]
I.
ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2013, Including All Addenda
(ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Std 90.1).
J.
ASHRAE Std 90.2 - Energy-Efficient Design of New Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.
K.
ASHRAE Std 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central
Furnaces and Boilers; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;
2007.
L.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
M. NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment; National Fire Protection Association;
2011.
N.
NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
O.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2012.
P.
NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2012.
Q.
NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances; National Fire
Protection Association; 2013.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING
23 81 27 - Page 1
R.
UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring
diagrams.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Filters: One for each unit.
2. Extra Pilot Thermocouples: One for each unit.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Provide three year manufacturers warranty for solid state ignition modules.
B.
Provide five year manufacturers warranty for heat exchangers.
C.
Provide five year manufacturers warranty for electronic air cleaners.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Lennox Industries: www.lennoxcommerical.com.
B.
Trane Inc: www.trane.com.
C.
York International Corporation / Johnson Controls: www.york.com.
2.02 OUTDOOR UNITS
A.
Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor and
condenser.
1. Comply with AHRI 210.
2. Refrigerant: R-410A.
3. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with
safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner.
4. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance with ASHRAE
Std 23.1 and UL 207.
5. Sound Rating: 69 dBA, when measured in accordance with AHRI 270.
B.
Compressor: AHRI 520; hermetic, two speed 1800 and 3600 rpm, resiliently mounted integral with
condenser, with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection,
service valves and drier. Provide time delay control to prevent short cycling and rapid speed changes.
C.
Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial propeller fan
resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard.
1. Condenser Fans: Direct-drive propeller type.
2. Condenser Fan Motor: Enclosed, 1-phase type, permanently lubricated.
D.
Coil: Air-cooled, aluminum fins bonded to copper tubes.
E.
Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset),
service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line).
1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves.
F.
Operating Controls:
1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.
2. Low Ambient Kit: Provide refrigerant pressure switch to cycle condenser fan on when condenser
refrigerant pressure is above 285 psig and off when pressure drops below 140 psig for operation to 0
degrees F.
SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING
23 81 27 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
G.
Mounting Pad: Precast concrete parking bumpers, minimum 4 inches square; minimum of two located
under cabinet feet.
2.03 GAS FURNACE COMPONENTS
A.
Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel ceramic coated clamshell type welded construction.
B.
Heat Exchanger: Cast iron combustion chamber with stainless and aluminized steel tailpipe and decoupler,
resiliently mounted.
C.
Heat Exchanger: Aluminized and stainless steel tubular type.
D.
Coating: Polypropylene.
E.
Insulation: Foil-faced.
F.
Burner: Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply,
1. Gas valve, two stage provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation,
safety pilot, manual set (On-Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valve.
2. Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter.
3. Combustion air damper with synchronous spring return damper motor.
4. Non-corrosive combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor.
G.
Burner Safety Controls:
1. Thermocouple Sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on
ignition failure.
2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation.
3. Vent Safety Shutoff Sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation,
manual reset.
4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet
temperature, automatic resets.
H.
Operating Controls:
1. Cycle burner by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.
2. Supply fan energized from bonnet temperature independent of burner controls, with adjustable timed
off delay and fixed timed on delay, with manual switch for continuous fan operation.
3. Provide continuous low speed fan operation.
I.
Flue Termination: Standard roof kit.
2.04 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A.
Room Thermostat: Wall-mounted, electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat with remote
sensor to maintain temperature setting; low-voltage; with following features:
1. System selector switch (heat-off-cool) and fan control switch (auto-on).
2. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
3. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint.
4. Set-up for four separate temperatures per day.
5. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days.
6. Short cycle protection.
7. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday.
8. Selection features including degree F or degree C display, 12 or 24 hour clock, keyboard disable,
remote sensor, fan on-auto.
9. Battery replacement without program loss.
10. Thermostat display:
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f.
Day of week.
g. System mode indication: heating, cooling, fan auto, off, and on, auto or on, off.
11. Manufacturers:
a. Lennox Industries: www.lennoxcommerical.com.
b. Trane Inc: www.trane.com.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING
23 81 27 - Page 3
c.
York International Corporation / Johnson Controls: www.york.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location.
C.
Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection.
D.
Verify that water supply is available for humidifier.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
C.
Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54.
D.
Install oil fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 31.
E.
Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211.
F.
Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.
G.
Install humidifiers in accordance with AHRI 610.
H.
Mount counterflow furnaces installed on combustible floors on additive base.
I.
Pipe drain from humidifiers to nearest floor drain.
3.03 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING
23 81 27 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 00 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
General Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26, 27 and 28.
B.
This Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, tools, construction
equipment and machinery, transportation, and all services required for the execution, completion and
operation of all electrical systems, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in the
Work.
1.02 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Contractor shall visit the site and shall familiarize himself with conditions which will affect work he is to
perform. Submission of a proposal by this Contractor shall be conclusive evidence that this Contractor has
visited the site and has given proper consideration and evaluation of these conditions in preparation of his
proposal. No allowance shall be made in his behalf for extra expense incurred due to failure or neglect on
his part to make this visit and examination.
B.
Where active sewers, gas, electric or other services are encountered during performance of this contract,
Contractor shall protect, brace and support them as required. Do not prevent, interrupt or disturb operation
of existing services that are to remain. Relocate existing service as required.
C.
Drawings show approximate locations of existing services. Contractor shall check with utility companies
and municipal agencies for exact locations of services which they may expect to encounter.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The following codes and standards, latest edition and/or revisions unless noted otherwise, are hereby
incorporated by reference and made a part of this specification:
1. Applicable Federal, State and local codes, ordinances and regulations, which also shall govern over
NEC should a conflict exist.
2. NEC - National Electrical Code, latest edition as approved by the local authority having jurisdiction.
3. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
4. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
5. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
6. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association.
7. ASTM - American Society for Testing of Materials.
8. Regulations of the local power utility company.
9. MEC - Michigan Energy Code.
10. HEW - Department of Health, Education and Welfare, HRA 76-4000.
11. OSHA - U.S. Occupational Safety and health Act.
12. MDPH - Michigan Department of Public Health Regulations.
13. Regulations of the local telephone utility company.
14. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Equipment and materials shall bear the "UL" label where labeling
service is regularly furnished.
15. NFPA - National Fire Prevention Association.
16. All work shall be in accordance with these codes and standards.
17. Notify Design Professional in writing and prior to bid opening of conflicts between these codes and
standards, and the drawings and specifications.
18. Whenever the requirements of Drawings and Specifications exceed those of the applicable codes and
standards listed, requirements of Drawings and Specifications shall govern.
1.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Contractor shall file approval forms when required, obtain and pay for all required permits, pay all required
deposits, arrange for and pay for all required or necessary inspections.
B.
Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections in keeping with project progress to prevent
unnecessary delays. Upon completion of the project, Contractor shall submit all final inspection certificates
to Design Professional for Owner’s file.
C.
Fire alarm and smoke detection system approvals shall comply with the following:
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 00 - Page 1
1.
2.
This project is subject to Act No. 144, Public Acts of 1982, State of Michigan approved by the
Governor, April 28, 1982. Only firms certified by the Michigan Bureau of Fire Services for fire alarm
system installation, modification, testing, servicing, inspection, maintenance and documentation shall
do the work required in this section.
Fire alarm Contractor shall submit documentation to the Michigan Bureau of Fire Services as required
by Section 29.(2) of the Act. Submission shall include the fee. Copies of this submission and payment
shall be furnished to the Design Professional as a condition of final payment.
1.05 COORDINATION
A.
Cooperate fully with all other Contractors and trades to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation
of interdependant systems and system elements.
B.
Coordinate location and electrical requirements for power sources related to electrically operated door
hardware items contained in Section 08 71 00.
1. Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing the point-of-connection for the electrified door
hardware and the conduit, raceway and boxes required for the ancillary hardware devices.
C.
Contractor shall consult Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature, and Specifications for all
trades to determine nature and extent of work specified in other sections which adjoins or attaches to his
work to which his work attaches or joins.
D.
Contractor shall confer with other Contractors and Subcontractors at the site to coordinate his work with
theirs in view of job conditions so that interferences may be eliminated and that maximum head room and
clearance may be obtained.
E.
In the event that interferences develop, Design Professional's decision will be final as to which trade shall
relocate its work and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of conduit, cabling or
equipment to clear such interferences.
F.
Cutting, patching and painting resulting from this Contractor's improper location or coordination of the work
shall be done by Contractor who originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear
expenses.
G.
Contractor is responsible for providing and installing any access panels or doors which may be required to
provide access to junction boxes, controls, fittings, switches, etc. that are installed behind permanent walls,
ceilings, bulkheads, soffits or floors.
1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for work and coordinate conduit and equipment
locations with other trades.
B.
All major patching and repairing of work caused by this Contractor shall be done by Contractor who
originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear expenses.
C.
No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be done without written permission from the Design
Professional.
D.
Provide fire stops for all openings in fire rated surfaces. Seal space between sleeves and conduits with
approved fire proofing material. Integrity of system shall be maintained to the rating of the item pierced.
1.07 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general layout of the electrical systems. All work shall be
executed in strict conformity with Drawings, accepted Shop Drawings and these Specifications. Drawings
are not to be scaled nor to serve as Shop Drawings.
B.
Drawings show design intent and this Contractor shall field check dimensions, actual locations, distances
and levels will be governed by actual field conditions and variations in equipment being provided.
C.
Contractor shall follow Drawings in laying out work and checking Drawings of other trades to verify spaces
in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where
headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, Design Professional shall be notified before proceeding
with installation.
D.
Contractor shall check latest architectural Drawings and locate light switches from same where door
swings are different from electrical Drawings.
E.
Items not specifically mentioned in Specifications or noted on Drawings, but which are obviously necessary
to make a complete working installation shall be included.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Job #14011
26 00 00 - Page 2
Copyright THA 062314
F.
If directed by Design Professional, this Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable
modifications in layout as needed to prevent conflicts with work of other trades or for proper execution of
work.
1.08 REFERENCES
A.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
B.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
D.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2000).
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A.
Design Professional will not be responsible for errors in quantities, dimensions to fit job conditions, details
of fabrication, or for errors resulting from mistakes in Submittals even though approved.
B.
Responsibility for these items rests with Contractor and his Suppliers.
1. Shop Drawings required shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
a. Each type of lighting fixture.
b. Panelboards.
c. Disconnect Switches.
d. Circuit Breakers.
e. Surface Raceway
f.
Fire Alarm Devices
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform in accordance with electrical codes required by the, State of Michigan.
1. Maintain one copy on project site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with
not less than three years of experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years
of experience.
D.
Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed in the State of Michigan.
E.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordinate all electrical material installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.
B.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
1.12 EQUIPMENT
A.
Only substitutions made by addendum, prior to receipt of bids, will be binding.
B.
After Award of Contract substitutions will only be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through
no fault of this Contractor.
C.
Where equipment manufacturer's names are listed, they are listed not only to indicate an acceptable
manufacturer, but further to insure providing a certain quality, a feature, or other item of design not
specifically mentioned in the detailed description.
D.
Where Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified or detailed on the Drawings,
which requires any redesign of structure, partitions, foundations, wiring or any other part of electrical or
architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new Drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be
prepared by this Contractor at his own expense.
E.
Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of wiring, conduit and
equipment from that specified or indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings, Contractor shall furnish and
install any such electrical wiring, conduit, etc., and any other additional equipment required by system at no
additional cost to Owner.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 00 - Page 3
1.13 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A.
In general, mounting heights above finished floor to the centerline of boxes and equipment shall be as
follows, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Bracket Exit Lighting Fixtures
7'-6" in rooms with 8'-0" ceilings
8'-0" in rooms w/9'-0" ceilings or higher
2. Switches and Pushbuttons
4'-0"
3. Receptacles - Finished Areas
1'-6"
4. Receptacles - Mechanical Rooms
3'-0"
5. Clock Outlets
7'-0" in rooms with 8'-0" ceilings
6. Clock Outlets
8'-0" in rooms with 9'-0" ceilings
7. Clock Outlets
9'-0" in rooms w/10'-0" ceilings or higher
8. Telephone Outlets - Desk Phones
1'-6"
9. Telephone Outlets - Wall Phones
4'-10"
10. Telephone Outlets - Pay Phones
3'-0"
11. Safety Switches
6'-0" to top
12. Motor Starters
5'-0"
13. Panels
6'-0" to top of panel providing bottom of
cabinet is not less than 1'-0" above floor
1.14 WARRANTY
A.
Contractor shall guarantee all work installed by him or his Subcontractor to be free from defect in materials
and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the work, unless a longer
period is stipulated under specific headings, and he shall repair or replace at no additional cost to Owner,
any material or equipment developing defected and shall also make good any damage caused by such
defected or the correction of defects. Repairs or replacements shall bear additional guarantee, as originally
called for, dated from the final acceptance of the repair of replacement. This requirement shall be binding
even though it will exceed product guarantees normally furnished by some manufacturers.
B.
Contractor shall submit his own and each equipment manufacturer's written certificate, warranting that
each item or equipment furnished complies with all requirements of Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Note that guarantee shall run from date of final acceptance of work, NOT from date of installation of a
device or piece of equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A.
Unless otherwise noted, all motors will be provided and installed by other trades for final connections by
Electrical Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP
A.
Execute the work required in a manner evidenced by the "best trade practices" contributing to efficiency of
operation, minimum maintenance, accessibility and aesthetics of the installation.
B.
Equipment and materials, unless noted otherwise as being reused, shall be new and shall conform to the
requirements of standard specification and tests of organizations as listed in this division and in the
requirements noted in other sections.
3.02 INSERTS, SLEEVES, OPENINGS, HANGERS, ETC.
A.
Furnish to General Contractor, before pouring of concrete or laying of masonry, all inserts, sleeves,
openings, hangers, etc., located in walls, floors, ceilings or roof necessary to complete the work, including
setting or location diagrams.
B.
Provide flashings and construct roof openings to meet the requirements of the roofing manufacturer and
requirements of Division 07.
C.
Provide fire stops for all electrical openings in fire rated surfaces. Seal space between sleeves and conduit
with approved fire proofing material. Integrity of system shall be maintained to the rating of the item
pierced. Coordinate with Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.03 CONCRETE
A.
Provide concrete work as indicated or required by Drawings and specifications.
B.
Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of the applicable sections of Division 3 of these
specifications for 3000 psi concrete.
3.04 PAINTING
A.
Touch-up paint manufacturer's finishes on electrical equipment marred during shipment, construction or
installation.
B.
Prime paint all bare metal electrical equipment supports, platforms, etc.
C.
Fronts of all flush cabinets shall have prime coat only. Finish coats will be by others.
D.
Make all joints in conduit laid in concrete or underground tight by applying a liberal coating of asphaltum
paint.
E.
Painting shall conform to the requirements of Division 9 of these specifications.
3.05 PARTS RECEIPT
A.
Electrical Contractor shall retain all portable and detachable portions of installation in his possession such
as keys, tools, wiring diagrams, manuals, etc., until completion of work and shall then turn them over to
Owner, or his authorized representative and obtain an itemized receipt. This receipt is to be attached to
request for final payment for electrical work
3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Conductors shall bear identification as to size and type of insulation and shall be equipped with wire
markers indicating the circuit number, wire number and/or phase letter.
B.
Identify electrical equipment with the name of equipment, equipment controlled or system involved.
C.
On all surface less than 4 inches square, identification shall be made by means of raised letters and
figures on an aluminum strip with a pressure sensitive adhesive.
D.
On surfaces 4 inches square and larger, in unfinished areas such as mechanical and boiler rooms,
identification shall be made by means of stenciling with bright yellow paint, or a good quality decal.
E.
Disconnecting switches, as required, shall have nameplates to indicate the circuit and panel from which the
service originates and the equipment which it controls.
F.
Lighting and receptacle panels shall have nameplates designating their name and voltage such as; LP-A,
120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 W.
G.
Nameplates shall be black laminated plastic with white characters. Characters on nameplates shall be 1/4
inch high, unless otherwise directed in field. Characters shall be engraved on nameplates with
nomenclature as shown on Drawings or as directed by Design Professional.
H.
Any stenciling shall be done only after the general painting of building interiors, etc., is completed.
3.07 PROTECTION AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Responsibility for care and protection of electrical work rests with Contractor until it has been tested and
accepted.
B.
After delivery, before and after installation, protect equipment and materials against theft, injury or damage
from all causes.
C.
Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings, etc., with temporary plugs, caps or burlap.
D.
Each Contractor shall receive, properly house, handle hoist, deliver to proper location, equipment and
other material required for this Contract.
3.08 REMODELING AND DEMOLITION WORK
A.
Remove all existing wire, conduit and electrical devices conflicting with construction, where old facilities are
indicated to be removed, and where new facilities replace old installations. Coordinate with other sections.
Where possible, retain existing conduits and switching.
B.
Furnish and install new conduit and wiring to replace existing conduit and wiring abandoned or removed as
a part of project where required.
C.
Furnish and install new switches where required on lighting circuits revised on this project.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 00 - Page 5
D.
Extend the existing conduit system or install new conduit and wire to provide electrical service to new
devices or existing devices where required.
E.
Existing electrical equipment interfering with new construction or where called for on Drawings, shall be
removed. All existing, exposed conduit abandoned as part of project shall be removed. All unused
openings in junction or pull boxes and device boxes shall be closed with a suitable cover or plug.
F.
Electrical equipment and materials removed on the project shall remain the property of Owner and shall be
stored in a location on property designated by Owner. If Owner refuses to accept any or all of the
demolition items, Contractor will be responsible to dispose of same.
G.
Existing electrical equipment, switches, controls, etc., interfering with new construction, but not being
abandoned as part of project, shall be relocated as may be necessary and/or as shown on Drawings.
3.09 EQUIPMENT, SUPPORTS, PLATFORMS, PADS AND FOUNDATIONS
A.
Provide equipment supports, platforms, pads and foundations as indicated or required by Drawings and
Specifications.
B.
Design, construction, and installation shall meet the requirements of all applicable codes, standards and
regulations of the agencies having jurisdiction and shall be compatible with equipment installed.
3.10 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A.
Electrical Contractor shall provide, install and maintain the following:
1. Temporary lighting as directed by the General Contractor during the Work.
B.
If additional power or wiring is required, Contractor requiring same shall pay the Electrical Contractor for
providing this service.
3.11 LIGHTING
A.
These specifications and accompanying Drawings contemplate furnishing of all labor and material
necessary for complete installation of fixtures and lamps for lighting fixtures shown on Drawings. These
fixtures shall be complete in every detail, properly wired and connected with circuits supplying same.
B.
When complete job is turned over to Owner, all lighting fixtures shall be clean.
C.
All fixtures shall bear UL seal of approval.
1. Each fluorescent ballast shall be electronic, conforming to the following:
a. Ballast shall be UL listed (Class P) and CSA certified.
b. Ballast sound levels shall not exceed Class A ambient noise level.
c. Total harmonic distortion level maintained at less than 20 percent.
d. Ballast shall have an average lamp current crest factor of 1.7 or below.
e. Where applicable, ballasts shall meet minimum efficacy standards of Public Law No. 100-357,
National Appliance Energy Conservation Amendments of 1988.
f.
Ballast shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A.
g. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 25 degrees C temperature rise over 40 degrees C
ambient.
h. Ballast shall have a frequency of operation of 20 KHz or greater, and operate without visible
flicker.
i.
Ballast shall have a power factor of 90 percent or above.
j.
Ballast shall not contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's).
k. Ballast shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and
Requlations, Part 18, Class A.
END OF SECTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 00 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 00 01
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Summary of acceptable electrical components and accessories included in the Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
Conform to requirements of all Codes and Standards listed in Section 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical
Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING METHODS
A.
Conductors And Cables:
1. Busway:
a. Material: Copper.
b. Assembly: Factory assembled.
c. Enclosure: Ventilated.
2. Insulated Single Conductors (600 Volts And Below):
a. Temperature Rating: 60 deg C.
b. Stranded Conductor Branch Circuits: Larger than 10 AWG: copper, 600 volt, THHN insulation.
c. Solid Conductor Branch Circuits 10 AWG and smaller: copper, 600 volt, THHN insulation.
d. Control Circuit Conductors: Copper, stranded, 600 volt, THHN insulation.
3. Insulated Multiple Conductor Cable:
a. Triplexed.
b. Jacketed:
1) Shielded.
2) Unshielded.
c. Underwater rated.
4. Armored Cable:
a. Type AC.
b. Type MC.
c. Type TC.
d. Jacketed metal clad cable.
5. Terminating Devices:
a. Cable lugs.
b. Cable connectors.
c. Compression lugs.
d. Splices and terminals:
1) Butt splices.
2) Barrel splices
3) Tap splices.
4) Spring wire for sizes #10 and smaller.
6. Accessories:
a. Cable grips.
b. Conductor harness.
c. Wire pulling lubricant.
d. Electrical insulating tape.
e. Conductor identifying markers.
7. Three Phase Conductor Identification:
a. Number 8 AWG and Smaller: Uniform colored jacket. Jacket color as indicated below.
b. Number 6 AWG and Larger: Tape applied to jacket within 6 inch of the end of each conductor.
Tape color as indicated below.
c. Jacket and Tape Color:
1) Conductors of 208/120 Volt Circuits:
(a) Phase A: Black.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 00 01 - Page 1
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
B.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White.
Ground: Green.
Raceways And Boxes:
1. Conduit And Electrical Tubing:
a. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) And Fittings:
1) EMT: Thin wall ferrous steel tubing, hot dipped, galvanized, smooth interior reamed ends.
2) Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Steel set-screw.
b. Flexible Metal Conduit And Fittings:
1) Conduit: Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out.
2) Fittings And Conduit Bodies: Galvanized steel.
c. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit And Fittings:
1) Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
2) Fittings And Conduit Bodies: Galvanized steel.
d. Plastic Conduit and Fittings:
1) Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC.
2) Fittings And Conduit Bodies: PVC.
e. Conduit Supports, Clamps, and Straps: Steel.
f.
Enclosures And Cabinets: Steel.
2. Junction Boxes: Rated for application, galvanized steel with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for
mounting wiring devices. Conform to requirements of NEMA 250-2003.
a. Minimum Sizes:
1) Octagonal: 4 inch wide by 1.5 inch deep.
2) Square: 4 inch square by 1.5 inch deep.
3) Dry Locations: Galvanized sheet steel, NEMA 1, welded seams and cover held by stainless
steel fasteners.
4) Damp or Wet Locations: Cast malleable iron with corrosion finish, NEMA 3R, threaded
conduit entries, neoprene coverplate gasket, and coverplate held by stainless steel
fasteners.
3. Outlet Boxes: Rated for application, galvanized steel with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for
mounting wiring devices. Conform to requirements of NEMA 250-2003.
a. Minimum Sizes:
1) Single Device: 3 inch high by 2 inch wide by 2 inch deep.
2) Gang Device: 3 inch high by 2 inch wide (per gang) by 2 inch deep.
3) Octagonal: 4 inch wide by 1.5 inch deep.
4) Square: 4 inch square by 1.5 inch deep.
5) Dry Locations: Galvanized sheet steel, NEMA 1, welded seams and cover held by stainless
steel fasteners.
6) Damp or Wet Locations: Cast malleable iron with corrosion finish, NEMA 3R, threaded
conduit entries, neoprene coverplate gasket, and coverplate held by stainless steel
fasteners.
4. Pull Boxes: Comply with requirements of NEMA 250-2003.
a. Dry Locations: Galvanized sheet steel, NEMA 1, welded seams and cover held by stainless steel
fasteners.
b. Damp or Wet Locations: Cast malleable iron with corrosion finish, NEMA 3R, threaded conduit
entries, neoprene coverplate gasket, and coverplate held by stainless steel fasteners.
5. Cast Boxes: Comply with requirements of NEMA 250-2003.
a. Cast Malleable Iron, Cadmium/Zinc Plated Finish: NEMA 3R, UL listed for application with
threaded conduit entries, neoprene coverplate gasket and threaded holes for mounting devices
and/or coverplates.
b. Cast Malleable Iron, Corrosion-Resistant Finish: Waterproof for flush mounting, with four
pre-pour leveling screws, after-pour top leveling screws, rectangular brass floor plate, gasket,
brass screws, and number of gangs prescribed.
c. Receptacle Floor Plates: Stainless Steel with hinged receptacle covers.
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 00 01 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Concrete Boxes: Galvanized steel with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounting devices.
Designed and UL Listed for encasing in concrete.
Masonry Boxes: Galvanized steel with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounting devices.
Designed and UL Listed for mounting in masonry walls.
Surface Raceways:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Pieces: One.
c. Compartments: One.
Conduit application schedule:
a. Schedule 40 Plastic (PVC) Conduit: Concealed interior locations.
b. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Concealed interior locations and exposed, dry interior locations
seven (7) feet AFF and higher.
c. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Exposed outdoor locations.
d. Flexible Metal Conduit: Connections between accessible junction boxes and lighting fixtures, in
dry locations.
e. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Equipment connections in wet locations.
Wiring Devices:
1. Floor Boxes:
a. Material: Cast malleable iron.
b. Mounting: Flush.
c. Receptacle Floor Plates: Brass with hinged receptacle covers.
2. Receptacles:
a. Duplex Receptacles:
1) Rating: 15 Amp, 125V, 3 wire duplex grounding type with Nylon face, feed-through feature
and prewired leads.
2) Color: White.
3) Receptacle Cover Plates:
(a) Material and Finish: Plastic, White.
b. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting (GFCI) Receptacles:
1) Rating: 15 Amp, 125V, 3 wire duplex grounding type with Nylon face, feed-through feature
and pre-wired leads.
2) Color: White.
3. Wall Switches:
a. Type: Single pole.
b. Rating: 20 Amp, 125 volt AC, totally enclosed toggle switch with grounding lug.
c. Color: White.
4. Wall Plates:
a. Material: Smooth plastic with matching metallic mounting screws and raised shoulder design.
b. Surface Mounted Coverplates: Match the particular size and type of box on which it is installed.
Do not extend coverplate beyond edge of box.
c. Weatherproof Coverplate: Spring loaded, die-cast aluminum with configuration to match outlet
type. Conform to code requirements for protection with plug installed.
d. Color: White.
5. Remote Control Switching Devices:
a. Types: Occupancy Sensors.
b. Technologies: Passive Infrared.
c. Ratings: 120 volt, 600 watt.
d. Type: Single pole switching devices.
e. Color: White.
2.02 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
a.
Panelboards:
1. Branch Circuit Panelboards:
a. Enclosures: Steel, dead front.
b. Overcurrent Protection: Molded case circuit breakers.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 00 01 - Page 3
c.
d.
Branch Circuit Numbering: Alternately by phase 1,3,5 and 2,4,6 connected to phases A,B,C
respectively.
Nameplate and Identification: Inside.
2.03 LIGHTING
A.
Interior Luminaires: As indicated on drawings.
2.04 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A.
Pull Stations: Surface-mounted device to match existing fire alarm system
B.
Signaling Devices: Recessed device to match existing fire alarm system.
C.
Fire Alarm Contractor shall be responsible for all fees associated with required permits, submissions and
inspections to the State of Michigan, Office of Fire Safety.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY
A.
The Contractor shall execute the Work in complete compliance with the requirements included in Section
26 00 00 and in a manner evidenced by the "best trade practices" associated with their profession.
B.
All facets of the General Requirements shall also apply to this Work.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 00 01 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 05 01
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electrical demolition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C.
Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
D.
Report discrepancies to Design Professional before disturbing existing installation.
E.
Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.
B.
Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.
C.
Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.
When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such
operations.
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A.
Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B.
Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
C.
Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut
conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
D.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them
is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.
E.
Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
F.
Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been
removed.
G.
Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
H.
Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
I.
Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access
panel as appropriate.
J.
Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations,
or as specified.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A.
Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.
B.
Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged
circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing
revised circuiting arrangement.
C.
Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior
surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
26 05 01 - Page 1
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Single conductor building wire.
B.
Metal-clad cable.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 26 05 01 - Minor Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing
electrical conductors and cables.
C.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding
conductors and grounding connectors.
D.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.
B.
ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,
or Soft; 2011.
C.
ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors
for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
D.
ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.
E.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
F.
NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2006.
G.
NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground Feeder
and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2007.
H.
NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).
I.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International
Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).
J.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K.
UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.
UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 183 - Manufactured Wiring Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N.
UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O.
UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P.
UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q.
UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
R.
UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
S.
UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
T.
UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 1
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with
the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage
drop.
2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts with piping or other
potential conflicts.
3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for
use with the conductors to be installed.
4. Notify Design Professional of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables,
including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes,
configurations, and stranding.
B.
Manufactured Wiring System Shop Drawings: Provide plan views indicating proposed system layout with
components identified; indicate branch circuit connections.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14
degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this
temperature is unavoidable, notify Design Professional and obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B.
Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A.
Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
B.
Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted,
or required.
C.
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D.
Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to view.
c. Where exposed to damage.
d. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for
those locations.
e. For isolated ground circuits.
E.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
F.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
G.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
H.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
I.
Underground Installations: Use only building wire in raceway or direct burial cable.
J.
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
K.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
L.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
M. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
N.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
American Wire and Cable Company: www.americanwireandcable.com.
B.
Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
C.
Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
indicated.
C.
Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.
D.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as
required for a complete operating system.
E.
Comply with NEMA WC 70.
F.
Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
G.
Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
H.
Conductor Material:
1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor
sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors
complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Minimum Conductor Size:
1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 200 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.
J.
Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction.
Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
c. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
d. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 3
e.
f
For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when
existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.
2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A.
Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.
Conductor Stranding:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
2. Control Circuits: Stranded.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D.
Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2.
E.
Conductor: Copper.
2.05 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 493,
Type UF-B.
B.
Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Conductor Stranding:
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E.
Cable Jacket: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant.
F.
Description: NFPA 70, Type UF.
G.
Conductor: Copper.
H.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
I.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
J.
Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning
legend describing buried electrical lines.
2.06 METAL-CLAD CABLE
A.
Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in
classified firestop systems to be used.
C.
Conductor Stranding:
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E.
Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.
F.
Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
G.
Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
H.
Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.
I.
Conductor: Copper.
J.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
K.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 60 degrees C.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
L.
Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
M. Armor Material: Steel.
N.
2.7
2.8
Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.
WIRING CONNECTORS
A.
Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be
connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.
B.
Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.
2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.
C.
Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed
for terminal lugs.
2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical
lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide
connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the
overcurrent protective device.
4. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to terminal
screws.
5. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.
D.
Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors
without stripping insulation.
E.
Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
F.
Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302
degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D
for damp and wet locations.
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com.
G.
Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
H.
Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
I.
Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection
to be made.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
WIRING ACCESSORIES
A.
Electrical Tape:
1. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510;
minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application
down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 5
B.
Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for
direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C.
Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed.
D.
Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for
use at the installation temperature.
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com.
c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C.
Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.
Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
F.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Circuiting Requirements:
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.
5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited
circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to
three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted.
Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
B.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
D.
Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type UF-B) in accordance with NECA 121.
E.
Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.
F.
Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by
the manufacturer.
G.
Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.
H.
Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building
structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.
I.
Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):
a. Use listed fittings.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
b.
Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do
not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
J.
Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
K.
Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.
L.
Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside
enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
M. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in
conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or
damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other
contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.
N.
Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the
application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.
O.
Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
P.
Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each
piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits
served by more than one nominal voltage system.
Q.
Provide wire and cable markers in accordance with Section 26 05 53 identifying circuit number or other
designation indicated at the following locations:
1. At each source and load connection.
2. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
3. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.
4. In cable tray, at maximum intervals of 20 feet.
R.
Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
S.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,
including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
T.
Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
U.
Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.
V.
Use wiring methods indicated.
W. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
X.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
Y.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Z.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
AA. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
AB. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with
its circuit number or other designation indicated.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 7
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Construction Manager's General
Requirements.
B.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Owner's requirements.
C.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
D.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required
for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.
E.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
F.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
END OF SECTION
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - Page 8
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Grounding and bonding requirements.
B.
Conductors for grounding and bonding.
C.
Connectors for grounding and bonding.
D.
Ground rod electrodes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for
conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.
B.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a
Ground System; 1983.
B.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
C.
NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2007.
D.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International
Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F.
NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
G.
NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2011.
H.
UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Notify Design Professional of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding
system components.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate proposed arrangement for signal reference grids. Include locations of items to be bonded and
methods of connection.
C.
Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and
connections.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - Page 1
C.
Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum five years documented
experience with high frequency grounding systems.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of ProjectNone N/A.
C.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they
may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
B.
Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
C.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors,
conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding
system.
D.
Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specified.
E.
Grounding Electrode System:
1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding
electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond
grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.
2. Steel Reinforcement or Structure Frame:
a. Provide connection to steel reinforcement or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance
with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location.
F.
Bonding and Equipment Grounding:
1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment
enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally
non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to
become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not
use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.
3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding
conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus
only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.
6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate
conduit movement.
2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A.
General Requirements:
1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
B.
Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 05 19:
1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exceptions:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1)
2)
C.
Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth.
Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).
Ground Rod Electrodes:
1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.
2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.
3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required, sectionalized ground
rods may be used.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
b. Galvan Industries, Inc: www.galvanelectrical.com.
c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com.
2.03 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
B.
Wire: Stranded copper.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
C.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with
NECA 1.
C.
Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where
encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at
least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates.
1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below finished grade.
2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod exposed.
D.
Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or
damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact
surfaces.
3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be
connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.
5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.
E.
Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
F.
Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve
specified resistance to ground.
G.
Install 4 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.
H.
Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where
indicated. Bond steel together.
I.
Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will provide field inspection.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - Page 3
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.
C.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
D.
Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous
48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
E.
Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified
requirements.
F.
Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 05 34
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
B.
Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
C.
Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable (Type MC),
armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems, including uses permitted.
B.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
D.
Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.
E.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.
C.
ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005.
D.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
E.
NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
F.
NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2003.
G.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and
Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).
H.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
I.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2003.
J.
NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004.
K.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L.
UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N.
UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O.
UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P.
UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q.
UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and
other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 1
3.
4.
B.
Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed
under other sections or by others.
Notify Design Professional of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A.
Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the
specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive
requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit.
C.
Underground:
1. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.
2. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or PVC-coated
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
3. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide
supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit
emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
D.
Embedded Within Concrete:
1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted.
2. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or PVC-coated
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
E.
Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit
(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F.
Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit
(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G.
Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit
(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H.
Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
I.
Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.
J.
Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit.
K.
Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
L.
Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
M. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they
comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel
through them.
B.
Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
C.
Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
D.
Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.
2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.
3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.
4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.
5. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.
6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
E.
Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specified.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.
2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 797.
C.
Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
D.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
E.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.
2.04 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A.
Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.
3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to
physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651;
material to match conduit.
D.
Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
E.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 3
2.09 ACCESSORIES
A.
Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.
B.
Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to
be installed.
C.
Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to
be installed.
D.
Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
E.
Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B.
Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
E.
Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
C.
Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
D.
Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
E.
Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the
manufacturer.
F.
Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.
G.
Conduit Routing:
1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across floors.
b. Across roofs.
c. Across top of parapet walls.
d. Across building exterior surfaces.
6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible
manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building
structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.
7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points.
8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.
9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings
where moisture may collect.
11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.
12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is
not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
c. Flues.
13. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
H.
Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not
provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.
a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between
conduit and mounting surface.
5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted
conduits.
6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.
7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit
clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where
approved).
9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.
10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.
11. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply with the
most stringent requirements.
I.
Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel
conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or
split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into
connectors.
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry
locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.
7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.
J.
Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams,
without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush
with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent
entry of moisture and gases.
6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.
7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs
where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as
indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include
proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
K.
Underground Installation:
1. Provide trenching and backfilling.
2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.
3. Provide underground warning tape along entire conduit length.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 5
L.
Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and
expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This
includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.
2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
M. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial
temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near
the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
N.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
B.
Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry
of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.
3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods required by code.
END OF SECTION
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 05 37
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B.
Pull and junction boxes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
E.
Section 26 05 34 - Conduit.
1. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between
pulling points.
F.
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
B.
NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
C.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and
Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).
D.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).
E.
NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 2).
F.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2008.
G.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H.
SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; Society of Cable Telecommunications
Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/SCTE 77).
I.
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
J.
UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
K.
UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.
UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
N.
UL 1203 - Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other
potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical
equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of
the actual equipment to be installed.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps,
support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits,
calculated according to NFPA 70.
Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under
other sections or by others.
Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes
where indicated.
Notify Design Professional of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and device boxes,
junction and pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures.
1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE 77 certified
by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon request.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOXES
A.
General Requirements:
1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to
accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.
B.
Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or
required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.
4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.
5. Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used.
6. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
7. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
8. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required.
9. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
10. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
11. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.
12. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish
with threaded hubs.
13. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL 514C.
14. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load
to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required.
15. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use
field-connected gangable boxes.
16. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
a.
Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch
deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.
b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 05.
c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.
17. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.
18. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-bell.com.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-raco.com.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com.
B.
Arrow-Hart/Division of Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.
C.
Bryant Electric/Division of Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-bryant.com.
2.03 OUTLET BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2
inch male fixture studs where required.
B.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide
threaded hubs.
2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B.
Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D.
Verify locations of boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA
130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.
C.
Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
NFPA 70.
D.
Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
F.
Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
G.
Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or
permitted.
H.
Box Locations:
1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as
required where approved by the Architect.
2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.
3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26.
b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 05.
4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 3
5.
6.
Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different
mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6
inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;
provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.
9. Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire-resistance will
not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24
inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or
protect both boxes with listed putty pads.
b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total
aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area.
10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to
limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05
34.
11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the
Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.
I.
Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports
and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes
used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do
not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support
system.
4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollow stud walls.
Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement.
J.
Install boxes plumb and level.
K.
Flush-Mounted Boxes:
1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front
edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or
does not project beyond finished surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised
cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum,
plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.
L.
Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with
Section 03 30 00.
M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
N.
Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.
O.
Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Cut box flush with finished floor after concrete pour.
P.
Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.
2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.
3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.
4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00, minimum 10
inches wide by 12 inches deep, around enclosures that are not located in concrete areas.
5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize
box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.
BOXES
Job #14011
26 05 37 - Page 4
Copyright THA 062314
Q.
Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 V.
R.
Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
S.
Close unused box openings.
T.
Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or
designated for future use.
U.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
V.
Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
W. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
X.
Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.
Y.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
Z.
Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
AA. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
AB. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access
panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
AC. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
AD. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and
backsplashes.
AE. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
AF. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
AG. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
AH. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide
minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
AI. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish
thickness.
AJ. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
AK. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both
supported within 12 inches of box.
AL. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
AM. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
AN. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
AO. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other
locations.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.
B.
Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for
installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 5
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electrical identification requirements.
B.
Identification nameplates and labels.
C.
Wire and cable markers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
B.
Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power
conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.
B.
ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.
C.
ASTM D 709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
E.
NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2012.
F.
UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and
associated sections, compartments, and components.
B.
Identification for Conductors and Cables:
1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.
2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded
power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution
equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage
system.
C.
Communication Cabinets: Nameplates.
D.
Conduit: Conduit markers.
E.
Control Device Station: Labels.
F.
Electrical Distribution and Control Equipment Enclosures: Nameplates.
G.
Junction Box Load Connections: Wire markers.
H.
Outlet Box Load Connections: Wire markers.
I.
Panel Gutter Load Connections: Wire markers.
J.
Pull Box Load Connections: Wire markers.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - Page 1
2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A.
Identification Nameplates:
1. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use.
2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic
with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.
a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches.
3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.
4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.
5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four,
located at corners for larger sizes.
B.
Identification Labels:
1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion
resistant.
a. Use only for indoor locations.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Format for Equipment Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2. Legend:
a. System designation where applicable:
1) Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY".
2) Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM".
b. Equipment designation or other approved description.
c. Other information as indicated.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height:
a. System Designation: 1 inch.
b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
c. Other Information: 1/4 inch.
d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10 feet above
floor or working platform.
5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.
b. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.
D.
Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and
maintenance.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.
5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exceptions:
1) Provide white text on red background for general information or operational instructions for
fire alarm systems.
E.
Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
F.
Letter Size:
1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
G.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for
identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Job #14011
26 05 53 - Page 2
Copyright THA 062314
2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A.
Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive
vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers
suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.
B.
Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.
C.
Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D.
Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.
F.
Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Description: Vinyl cloth type self-adhesive wire markers.
H.
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and at
load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits and with
control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
1. Use the following colors for color-coding phase conductors:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
I.
Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on
drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance.
Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
6. Conduits: Legible from the floor.
7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
8. Devices: Outside face of cover.
C.
Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D.
Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces
using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate can not be penetrated.
E.
Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and
edges properly sealed.
F.
Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper
adhesion.
B.
Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
C.
Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - Page 3
D.
Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
E.
Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09 90 00.
1. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet.
2. Paint bands 20 feet on center.
3. Colors:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Nameplates.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision
D, 2006.
B.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
C.
NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2009.
D.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.
E.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not
More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005).
F.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.
G.
NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
H.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.
I.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
J.
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
K.
UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
L.
UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards,
enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent
protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor
terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA
407.
B.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy
plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 1
C.
Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each panelboard key.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.
B.
General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.
C.
Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D.
Siemens: www.siemens.com.
E.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS
A.
Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service
conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
C.
Short Circuit Current Rating:
D.
Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
F.
Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder
and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G.
Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H.
Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following
installation locations:
2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening.
4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,
connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A.
Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit
breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as
indicated on the drawings.
B.
Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C.
Bussing:
1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.
2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
3. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D.
Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Enclosures:
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
1.
2.
Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
F.
Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.
G.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide
insulated ground bus where scheduled.
H.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated.
1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
I.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip
handle for all poles; UL listed.
1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.
2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.
3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
J.
Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
K.
Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for 480 volt
panelboards.
L.
Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and
flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers
listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable;
ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current
rating indicated, but not less than:
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short
circuit current rating indicated.
3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for
overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.
5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general
workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.
C.
Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
NFPA 70.
D.
Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
E.
Install panelboards plumb.
F.
Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening
completely covered.
G.
Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches
does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
H.
Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed
into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
I.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
J.
Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 3
K.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.
L.
Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
M. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches
above floor.
N.
Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
O.
Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and each power
distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating the loads served. Identify
spares and spaces.
P.
Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
Q.
Provide identification nameplate for each panelboard in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
R.
Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.
S.
Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify
each as SPARE.
1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch.
T.
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with General Requirements.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.
D.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit
breakers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
B.
Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
C.
Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured
steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain
proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Wall dimmers.
C.
Receptacles.
D.
Wall plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding.
B.
Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G,
2001.
B.
FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal
Specification; Revision F, 1999.
C.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
D.
NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1999 (R 2005).
E.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2002 (R2008).
F.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
G.
UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
H.
UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.
UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.
UL 1917 - Solid-State Fan Speed Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under
other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual
equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.
4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide
suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
5. Notify Design Professional of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
B.
Sequencing:
1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 1
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bryant Electric: www.hubbell-bryant.com.
B.
Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.
C.
Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
D.
Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A.
Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B.
For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not
less than that of the branch circuit.
C.
Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed
outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
D.
Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units.
E.
Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
F.
Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed in kitchens.
G.
Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
H.
Provide isolated ground receptacles for all receptacles serving computers and electronic cash registers.
I.
Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
J.
For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.
K.
For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.
2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES
A.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
B.
Finishes:
1. All Wiring Devices: Ivory with white stainless steel wall plate unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A.
All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying
with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS
W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring
with separate ground terminal screw.
B.
Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
2. Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red handle.
3. Ratings:
a. Voltage: 120 volts, AC.
b. Current: 20 amperes.
C.
Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, and 3-way.
2.05 RECEPTACLES
A.
All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying
with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring
with separate ground terminal screw.
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.
Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498 Supplement SD, with green dot
hospital grade mark on device face.
B.
Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
C.
Duplex Convenience Receptacles.
D.
GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory
requirements.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A.
Cover plates for receptacles, switrches, phone and data shall be deluxe, smooth, 304 stainless steel. Use
oversized deluxe, smooth, stainless steel for devices installed in masonry walls.
1. Cover Plates For Wiring Devices: Cooper #93XXX.
B.
Weatherproof cover plates for receptacles outdoors or as indicated on Drawings shall be heavy-duty
construction, gasketed for weather resistance, UL listed for application. Use "in-use" covers in all wet
locations and metal "wet" location when closed covers in damp locations. RE: NEC 406.8.
1. Damp Location, Vertical: Hubbell #WP26 (WPF526)
2. Wet Location, Vertical: Hubbell #WP26M
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
B.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C.
Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
D.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
E.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights
specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
D.
Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
E.
Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
F.
Install wall switches with OFF position down.
G.
Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by
manufacturer.
H.
Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
I.
Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without
strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough
openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
J.
Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or
designated for future use.
K.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
L.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
M. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 3
N.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
O.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 to obtain mounting heights specified.
B.
Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
C.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter.
E.
Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor.
F.
Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
G.
Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished
floor.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Owner's requirements.
B.
Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
D.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
E.
Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
F.
Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory
finish.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Interior luminaires.
B.
Emergency lighting units.
C.
Exit signs.
D.
Ballasts.
E.
Fluorescent emergency power supply units.
F.
Lamps.
G.
Luminaire accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
B.
NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2006.
C.
NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
E.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection
Association; 2009.
F.
UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each fixture that is not a standard product of the
manufacturer.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings,
service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model
number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of product.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA
502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - SEE SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 1
D.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,
reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and
distribute the light.
F.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors,
hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.
G.
Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage,
distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A.
Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes,
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
B.
Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage
drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for
minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon
restoration of normal power source.
C.
Battery:
1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated.
D.
Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate
emergency operation.
E.
Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.
2.04 EXIT SIGNS - SEE SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS.
A.
All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and
all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.
2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.
2.05 BALLASTS
A.
All Ballasts:
1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state
ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.
2.06 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS
A.
Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated
luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 924.
B.
Compatibility:
1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts,
including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.
C.
Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches connected
lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency
illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.
D.
Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to
display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation.
2.07 LAMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com.
3. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.
B.
All Lamps:
1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
2.
3.
4.
C.
Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified,
provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.
Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp
efficiency standards.
Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products
which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the
Design Professional to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.
Lamp Types: As specified for each fixture.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of
luminaires provided under this section.
B.
Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general
workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D.
Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
E.
Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial
lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
F.
Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide
pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
G.
Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
H.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
I.
Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with
each other. Secure to prevent movement.
J.
Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires in grid ceiling directly from building structure.
K.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
L.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements
for fire rating.
M. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
N.
Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on
Drawings.
O.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
P.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit.
Q.
Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided using flexible conduit.
R.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within luminaire.
S.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
T.
Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
U.
Emergency Lighting Units:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal
lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
V.
Exit Signs:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal
lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
W. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units:
1. For field-installed units, install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated. Where installation inside
luminaire is not possible, install on top of luminaire.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 3
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal
ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
X.
Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
Y.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Construction Manager's General Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.
Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C.
Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 10 00 and Section 26 00 00.
D.
Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
E.
Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to
verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.
F.
Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace
excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Design Professional.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by
Design Professional. Secure locking fittings in place.
B.
Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path
as required or as directed by Design Professional or authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate
egress path as directed by Design Professional or authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Aim and adjust luminaires as directed by Design Professional and in accordance with all codes.
E.
Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and
manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes
to match original factory finish.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Design Professional and Owner, and
correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
B.
Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Replace failed lamps in all luminaires at Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit.
B.
Transmitters for communication with supervising station.
C.
Circuits from protected premises to supervising station, including conduit.
D.
Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit indicated.
E.
Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression.
B.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers monitored and controlled by fire alarm system.
C.
Section 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final
Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)
AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008).
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code; 2013.
E.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; 2012.
F.
NFPA 601 - Standard for Security Services in Fire Loss Prevention; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposal Documents: Submit the following with cost/time proposal:
1. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
2. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each control unit, initiating device, and notification appliance.
3. Certification by Contractor that the system design will comply with the contract documents and code
requirements.
4. Proposed maintenance contract.
B.
Drawings must be prepared AutoCAD 2012.
1. Owner will provide floor plan drawings for Contractor's use; verify all dimensions on Owner-provided
drawings.
C.
Evidence of designer qualifications.
D.
Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having
jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation:
1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72
Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required.
4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.
5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control
unit programming.
6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare
capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations.
7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.
8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation
instructions, and circuit length limitations.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 31 00 - Page 1
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
E.
Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating
adequate battery power.
Detailed drawing of graphic annunciator(s).
Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other
component that the components are compatible with the control unit.
Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract
documents.
Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents.
Do not show existing components to be removed.
Evidence of installer qualifications.
F.
Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline.
G.
Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.
H.
Inspection and Test Reports:
1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.
2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.
3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.
I.
Operating and Maintenance Data: Have one set available during closeout demonstration:
1. Original copy of NFPA 72 with portions that are not relevant to this project neatly crossed out by
hand; label with project name and date.
2. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction.
3. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same
manuals.
4. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service.
5. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing.
6. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply.
7. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.
8. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed
copy and computer format acceptable to Owner.
9. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative
personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and
when entering into contracts for remodeling.
J.
Project Record Documents:
1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones.
2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications.
3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output
chart, and voice messages by event.
K.
Closeout Documents:
1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation
requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized
representative of authority having jurisdiction.
3. Certificate of Occupancy.
4. Maintenance contract.
5. Report on training results.
L.
Maintenance Materials, Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. Furnish spare parts of same manufacturer and model as those installed; deliver in original packaging,
labeled in same manner as in operating and maintenance data and place in spare parts cabinet.
2. In addition to the items in quantities indicated in PART 2, furnish the following:
a. All tools, software, and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system using Owner's
personnel; minimum modification capability to include addition and deletion of devices, circuits,
and zones, and changes to system description, operation, and evacuation and instructional
messages.
b. Two copies, on CD-ROM, of all software not resident in read-only-memory.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 31 00 - Page 2
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
c.
Extra Fuses: Two for each installed fuse; store inside applicable control cabinet.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Copies of Design Criteria Documents: Maintain at the project site for the duration of the project, bound
together, an original copy of NFPA 72, the relevant portions of applicable codes, and instructions and
guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction; deliver to Owner upon completion.
B.
Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire
protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with
experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of
the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business.
1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that
installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification.
2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems.
3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address.
4. Contract maintenance office located within 50 miles of project site.
5. Certified in the State of Michigan as fire alarm installer.
D.
Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified
qualifications.
E.
Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory, and able to
provide the required training; trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are
free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire Alarm Control Units – Match existing.
B.
Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances:
1. Same manufacturer as control units.
2. Provide all initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer.
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A.
Fire Alarm System: Provide an updated automatic fire detection and alarm system:
1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not.
2. Protected Premises: Area as shown on drawings.
3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as
listed:
a. ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
b. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction.
c. Applicable local codes.
d. The contract documents (drawings and specifications).
e. NFPA 101.
f.
NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts
between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design
documents.
4. Evacuation Alarm: General evacuation of entire premises.
5. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone, with alarm
notification.
6. Hearing Impaired Occupants: Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling
units.
7. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP): New, located as shown on Drawings.
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 31 00 - Page 3
8. Combined Systems: Do not combine fire alarm system with other non-fire systems.
9. Remote Supervising Station: UL-listed central station under contract to facility.
10. Means of Transmission to Remote Supervising Station: Two (2) telephone lines.
B.
Circuits:
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B.
2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): Class B.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B.
C.
Spare Capacity:
1. Initiating Device Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
2. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
3. Speaker Amplifiers: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
4. Master Control Unit: Capable of handling all circuits utilized to capacity without requiring additional
components other than plug-in control modules.
D.
Power Sources:
1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system.
2. Secondary: Storage batteries.
3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72.
4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
2.03 EXISTING COMPONENTS
A.
Existing Fire Alarm System: Remove portions of existing system indicated on Drawings after new system is
fully operational and tested.
B.
Remove unused existing components and materials from site and dispose of properly.
2.04 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES
A.
Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:
1. Sprinkler water control valves.
2. Elevator shut-down control circuits.
B.
Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:
1. Sprinkler water flow.
2. Elevator lobby, elevator hoistway, and elevator machine room smoke detectors.
3. Duct smoke detectors.
C.
Elevators:
1. Elevator lobby, hoistway, and machine room smoke detectors: Elevator recall for fire fighters' service.
2. Elevator Machine Room Heat Detector: Shut down elevator power prior to hoistway sprinkler
activation.
3. Sprinkler pressure or waterflow: Shut down elevator power prior to hoistway sprinkler activation.
D.
HVAC:
1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Shut down air handlers indicated.
2.05 COMPONENTS
A.
General:
1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit
are acceptable.
2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and
maintenance data.
B.
Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Addressable type; listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.
Master Control Unit: As specified for Basis of Design above, or equivalent.
D.
Remote Annunciators:
E.
Initiating Devices:
1. Manual Pull Stations:
a. Provide 2 extra.
2. Smoke Detectors:
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 31 00 - Page 4
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
3.
4.
5.
a. Provide 2 extra.
Duct Smoke Detectors:
a. Provide 4 extra.
Heat Detectors:
Addressable Interface Devices:
a. Provide 4 extra.
F.
Notification Appliances:
1. Strobes:
a. Provide 2 extra.
2. Horn Strobes:
a. Provide 2 extra.
G.
Circuit Conductors: Copper; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label.
H.
Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70;
except for optical fiber conductors.
1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac),
line-to-neutral, and 350 V(ac), line-to-line; do not use fuses.
2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge
protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to protect applicable equipment;
for 24 V(dc) maximum dc clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line-to-ground, and 72 V(dc), line-to-line.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building,
rated to protect applicable equipment.
I.
Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner.
1. Provide the same standard lock and key for each key operated switch and lockable panel and
cabinet; provide 5 keys of each type
J.
Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is
received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station.
1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover.
2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed.
3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner.
4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal.
K.
Storage Cabinet for Spare Parts and Tools: Steel with baked enamel finish, size appropriate to quantity of
parts and tools.
1. Locate as directed by Owner near Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents.
B.
Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas.
C.
Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation.
D.
Install instruction cards and labels.
3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION
A.
Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.
B.
Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and
tests and for observation by their personnel.
C.
Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise
inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments.
D.
Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required.
E.
Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.
F.
Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities;
document each inspection and test.
G.
Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract
documents.
Job #14011
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Copyright THA 062314
28 31 00 - Page 5
H.
Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode
for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions.
1. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction.
3. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow
Owner personnel to perform normal duties.
4. At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form."
3.03 OWNER'S PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION
A.
Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel:
1. Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system.
2. Factory Instruction: At control unit manufacturer's training facility.
B.
Maintenance Technicians: Detailed training for Owner's staff, on programming, maintaining, repairing, and
modifying; factory training:
1. Initial Training: One (1) Day Session, pre-closeout.
C.
Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and maintenance data
available during instruction.
3.04 CLOSEOUT
A.
Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner.
1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, copy of project record drawings,
input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration.
3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration.
4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction;
notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration.
5. Repeat demonstration until successful.
B.
Occupancy of the project will not occur prior to Substantial Completion.
C.
Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and:
1. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed.
2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered.
3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered.
4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner.
5. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Occupancy permit has been granted.
7. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty
period, to include the work described below.
B.
Provide to Owner, a proposal for later acceptance, for a maintenance contract for Five (5) Years, to include
the work described below; include the total cost of contract, proposal to be valid at least until 30 days after
date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including:
1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system.
2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the
maintenance contractor.
3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification.
2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner.
3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on
actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal
working hours in maintenance contract.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 31 00 - Page 6
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
E.
Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning,
inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
F.
Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit,
the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. Submit
duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit.
G.
Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security.
END OF SECTION
Job #14011
Copyright THA 062314
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 31 00 - Page 7